ADIC FCR 250 Specifications

Scalar 1000 Library
Operator Guide
Copyright Notice
© Copyright ADIC 2000
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are
reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another
language without prior written consent of ADIC.
ADIC shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages
(including lost profits) in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material
whether based on warranty, contract, or other legal theory.
All trademarks within this document are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright Notice (Europe)
© Copyright ADIC Europe 2000
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of ADIC Europe, ZAC des Basses Auges, 1 rue Alfred de
Vigny, 78112 Fourqueux, FRANCE.
ADIC Europe assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document, and
retains the right to make changes to these specifications and descriptions at any time, without
notice.
This publication may describe designs for which patents are pending, or have been granted. By
publishing this information, ADIC Europe conveys no license under any patent or any other right.
ADIC Europe makes no representation or warranty with respect to the contents of this document
and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular
purpose. Further, ADIC Europe reserves the right to revise or change this publication without
obligation on the part of ADIC Europe to notify any person or organization of such revision of
change.
Every effort has been made to acknowledge trademarks and their owners. Trademarked names are
used solely for identification or exemplary purposes, any omission are made unintentionally.
ADIC and ADIC Europe are trademarks of Advanced Digital Information Corporation.
Advanced Digital Information Corporation
Tel.: +1 303-705-3900 (USA)
Fax: +1-303-792-2465 (USA)
Customer Assistance: 1-800-827-3822
World Wide Web: http://www.adic.com
Document number: 600561-A
Published: 01 Aug 2000
ADIC Europe
ADIC/GRAU Storage Systems GmbH
ZAC des Basses Auges
Eschenstraße 3
1, rue Alfred de Vigny
D-89558 Böhmenkirch, Germany
78112 Fourqueux, France
Tel:+00.800.9999.3822
Tel.: +33.1.3087.5300
Fax: +33.1.3087.5301
Printed in the USA
ADIC • 10949 EAST PEAKVIEW AVENUE • ENGLEWOOD, COLORADO, USA • 1-800-827-3822
Contents
1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Explanation of Symbols and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Federal Communication Commission Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2
Description
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Subsystem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Host Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Management Unit (RMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Functional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Control Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cartridge Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Cartridge Storage and Tape Drive Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
3
Safety
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Hazard Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Area of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Library Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Mechanical Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Main Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
4
Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Remote Management Unit (RMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
System Administrator Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Menu Structure Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Left Navigation Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Top Information Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Center Navigation Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
iv
Contents
600561-A
Scalar 1000 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Scalar 1000 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Normal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Scalar 1000 Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
5
Menus and Commands
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Operator Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Common Help Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Operator Intervention Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Main Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Mode Dialog Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Status Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Mode Parms Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Element Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Mixed Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Reservations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Command Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Media Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Commands Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Move Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
01 Aug 2000
Contents
v
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Eject Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Eject Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Database Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Learn Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Manipulate Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Manipulate Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Setup Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Target ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Parity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Ports Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Host Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Security Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Switching Security From Off to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Switching Security From On to Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
RMU Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Name/DHCP Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
IP Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Utils Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Unload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
vi
Contents
600561-A
Initialize Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
SCSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Service Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Start Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Diags Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Loopback Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Sensors Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Wrap Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Locks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Get/Put Storage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Get/Put Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Adjust Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Trigger Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Fiducial Test Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Move Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
PowerSup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Status Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Drive Mounts Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Other Functions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
About Screen Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
6
Processing Media
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inserting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
01 Aug 2000
Contents
vii
Direct Insertion into the Control or Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ejecting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Direct Removal from the Control or Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Processing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Barcode Label Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Applying the Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Firmware Directed Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Operator Initiated Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
7
Error Messages
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Service Action Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Error Log Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Index
viii
Contents
600561-A
Figures
Figure 2-1
Scalar 1000 Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Figure 2-2
Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-3
Half Inch Storage Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-4
8mm Storage Cell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-5
Gripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-6
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 4-1
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-2
Startup Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4-3
Help Content Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-4
Scalar 1000 Documentation Files Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-5
Technical Support Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-6
Version Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-7
Login Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-8
Configuration Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-9
Confirm Configuration Changes Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-10
DHCP Enabled Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4-11
Firmware Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-12
Diagnostics File Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4-13
Operator Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4-14
Logs Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Figure 4-15
Initial Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Figure 4-16
Reboot Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
ix
x
Figures
Figure 5-1
Directory Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Figure 5-2
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-3
Mode Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Figure 5-4
Ready Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-5
NotReady Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-6
Shutdown Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-7
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Figure 5-8
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5-9
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5-10
Mode Parms Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5-11
Element Address/Current Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Figure 5-12
Element Address/Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Figure 5-13
Element Address/Saved Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Figure 5-14
Mixed Media/Current Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Figure 5-15
Mixed Media/Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Figure 5-16
Mixed Media/Saved Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Figure 5-17
Parity/Current Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-18
Parity/Default Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5-19
Parity/Saved Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Figure 5-20
LCD/Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5-21
LCD/Default Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5-22
LCD/Saved Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Figure 5-23
Reservation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Figure 5-24
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Figure 5-25
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5-26
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Figure 5-27
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Figure 5-28
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Figure 5-29
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Figure 5-30
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 5-31
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Figure 5-32
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Figure 5-33
Command Log Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
600561-A
01 Aug 2000
Figure 5-34
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Figure 5-35
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 5-36
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Figure 5-37
Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Figure 5-38
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Figure 5-39
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Figure 5-40
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Figure 5-41
Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Figure 5-42
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Figure 5-43
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Figure 5-44
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Figure 5-45
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Figure 5-46
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Figure 5-47
Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Figure 5-48
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Figure 5-49
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Figure 5-50
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Figure 5-51
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Figure 5-52
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5-53
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Figure 5-54
Move Media Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Figure 5-55
Target Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Figure 5-56
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5-57
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Figure 5-58
Warning Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Figure 5-59
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Figure 5-60
Number of Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Figure 5-61
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Figure 5-62
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Figure 5-63
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Figure 5-64
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Figure 5-65
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Figure 5-66
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Figures
xi
xii
Figures
Figure 5-67
Insert Range Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Figure 5-68
Target Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Figure 5-69
Usage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Figure 5-70
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
Figure 5-71
Eject Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Figure 5-72
Eject Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Figure 5-73
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Figure 5-74
Eject Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Figure 5-75
Eject Clean Tape Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5-76
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Figure 5-77
Database Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Figure 5-78
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Figure 5-79
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5-80
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Figure 5-81
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Figure 5-82
Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
Figure 5-83
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Figure 5-84
Continuation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Figure 5-85
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Figure 5-86
Learn Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Figure 5-87
Manipulate Get Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Figure 5-88
Manipulate Put Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Figure 5-89
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Figure 5-90
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Figure 5-91
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Figure 5-92
Target ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Figure 5-93
Parity Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Figure 5-94
Ports Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Figure 5-95
Host Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Figure 5-96
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Figure 5-97
Security Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Figure 5-98
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Figure 5-99
Security is ON Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
600561-A
01 Aug 2000
Figure 5-100
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Figure 5-101
Security is OFF Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Figure 5-102
Change Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Figure 5-103
Password Changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Figure 5-104
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Figure 5-105
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Figure 5-106
RMU Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Figure 5-107
Name/DHCP Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Figure 5-108
IP Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Figure 5-109
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Figure 5-110
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Figure 5-111
SCSI ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Figure 5-112
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Figure 5-113
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Figure 5-114
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Figure 5-115
Usage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Figure 5-116
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Figure 5-117
Utils Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Figure 5-118
Library Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Figure 5-119
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Figure 5-120
Timeout Value Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Figure 5-121
Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Figure 5-122
Password Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111
Figure 5-123
Invalid Password Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Figure 5-124
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Figure 5-125
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Figure 5-126
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Figure 5-127
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Figure 5-128
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Figure 5-129
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Figure 5-130
Element Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Figure 5-131
Drive Range Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Figure 5-132
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Figures
xiii
xiv
Figures
Figure 5-133
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Figure 5-134
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Figure 5-135
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Figure 5-136
Unload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Figure 5-137
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
Figure 5-138
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
Figure 5-139
Initialize Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Figure 5-140
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Figure 5-141
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
Figure 5-142
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Figure 5-143
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Figure 5-144
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Figure 5-145
Preventive Maintenance Due Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Figure 5-146
Confirm Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Figure 5-147
Start Dialog with No Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Figure 5-148
Start Dialog with Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Figure 5-149
Diags Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
Figure 5-150
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Figure 5-151
Loopback Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Figure 5-152
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Figure 5-153
Sensors Submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Figure 5-154
Wrap Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Figure 5-155
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Figure 5-156
Real Time Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Figure 5-157
Locks Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Figure 5-158
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Figure 5-159
Get/Put Storage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Figure 5-160
Continuation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Figure 5-161
Number of Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Figure 5-162
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Figure 5-163
Get/Put Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Figure 5-164
Continuation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
Figure 5-165
Number of Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
600561-A
01 Aug 2000
Figure 5-166
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Figure 5-167
Step Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Figure 5-168
Continuation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Figure 5-169
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Figure 5-170
Adjust Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Figure 5-171
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Figure 5-172
Fiducial Test Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Figure 5-173
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Figure 5-174
Move Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Figure 5-175
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Figure 5-176
Step Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Figure 5-177
Movement Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
Figure 5-178
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
Figure 5-179
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
Figure 5-180
Power Supply Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
Figure 5-181
Function Not Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
Figure 5-182
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Figure 5-183
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Figure 5-184
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Figure 5-185
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
Figure 5-186
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
Figure 5-187
Starting and Ending Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
Figure 5-188
Progress Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
Figure 5-189
Response Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171
Figure 5-190
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Figure 5-191
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Figure 5-192
Include Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173
Figure 5-193
Response Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174
Figure 5-194
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Figure 5-195
Status Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Figure 5-196
Drive Mounts Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Figure 5-197
Other Functions Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Figure 5-198
About Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
Figures
xv
Figure 6-1
xvi
Figures
Barcode Label Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
600561-A
Tables
Table 2-3
Element Coordinates for Firmware 2.3 or higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Table 2-4
Library Element Indexing for Firmware 2.30 or Below . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Table 2-5
Library Element Indexing for Firmware 3.0 or Higher . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Table 2-6
Scalar 1000 Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Table 3-1
Hazard Alert Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Table 4-1
Operator Panel Push Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Table 4-2
Operator Panel Visual Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Table 5-1
Operating State and Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Table 6-1
Supported Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Table 7-1
SAC Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Table 7-3
Error Log Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
xvii
xviii
Tables
600561-A
1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Explanation of Symbols and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Federal Communication Commission Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-2
Introduction
600561-A
1-
Overview
This manual contains information and instructions necessary
for the safe operation of the Scalar 1000 1 library. The topics
discussed in this chapter are:
•
Overview
•
Intended Audience
•
Organization
•
Associated Documents
•
Explanation of Symbols and Notes
•
Assistance
Intended Audience
This guide is intended for operators, trained customer
specialists, and maintenance personnel of the service partner
who interact with the Scalar 1000.
Organization
This publication contains chapters detailing the operation of
the Scalar 1000. The chapters topics include:
Chapter 1
Introduction - Describes the overview,
intended audience, organization,
associated documents, explanation of
symbols and notes, and how to obtain
additional assistance.
Chapter 2
Description - Describes general
information about the Scalar 1000
components.
Chapter 3
Safety - Describes the hazard symbols,
messages, safety features, and operational
considerations for the safe operation of the
Scalar 1000.
Chapter 4
Operation - Describes the Remote
Management Unit operations and menus,
and functional start up and shut down
operations of the Scalar 1000.
1. Scalar 1000 is a trademark of ADIC. Throughout the remainder of this document, we refer to
the Scalar 1000 library as the Scalar 1000.
01 Aug 2000
Overview
1-3
Chapter 5
Menus and Commands - Describes the
visual menus and commands executed by
the Scalar 1000.
Chapter 6
Processing Media- Describes the
Insert/Eject station, various media, and
processing of the media.
Chapter 7
Error Messages - Describes message
processing and troubleshooting hints.
Index
Associated Documents
600838
Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide
600974
Scalar 1000 SCSI Reference Manual
Explanation of Symbols and Notes
The following symbols and highlighted passages note
important information.
Detailed explanations for the above symbols are provided in
Hazard Alert Messages on page 3-3.
1-4
Introduction
<1> + <2>
Press these keys simultaneously.
Italics
Headline, e. g., Chapter 2, Description
File name, e. g., AMUINST.EXE
Bold
Terms appearing on the operating panel
Special Term, e. g., Utilities
Operating element/key on the operating
panel
Courier
Command line,
Switch position, e. g., ON, OFF
600561-A
Assistance
Warning
Operation of the Scalar 1000 by untrained personnel can
lead to dangerous situations. The consequence could be
severe or fatal injury caused by contact with electrical
connections. Therefore, introductory training by ADIC is
recommended for all who work with the Scalar 1000.
An operator is responsible for ensuring that only qualified
personnel perform the following procedures on the
equipment:
Warning
•
Prepare for operation
•
Set-up
•
Start-up
•
Operate
•
Shutdown
•
Maintenance
•
Restart
Some work and modifications can only be performed with
the appropriate qualifications and training.
Most importantly, know and observe all safety rules before
working with the equipment.
If problems cannot be solved with the aid of this document or
if recommended training is desired, contact the ADIC
Technical Assistance Center (ATAC).
Phone
Number
In the USA:
800.827.3822
Outside the USA, toll free:
00800.9999.3822
Outside the USA:
303.874.0188
Send email to:
techsup@adic.com
Federal Communication Commission
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
01 Aug 2000
Assistance
1-5
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
To meet FCC emissions limits, properly shielded and
grounded cables and connectors must be used. The user
accepts responsibility for radio or television interference
caused by improperly shielded or grounded cables and
connectors or by unauthorized modifications or changes to
the equipment. Unauthorized modifications or changes could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
1-6
Introduction
600561-A
2
Description
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Subsystem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Host Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Remote Management Unit (RMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Functional Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Control Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cartridge Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Tape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Cartridge Storage and Tape Drive Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2
Description
600561-A
2-
Overview
An in-depth description of the subsystem, tape cartridge,
storage and drive configuration, and optional features are
provided.
Subsystem Description
The Scalar 1000 is a library that automates the retrieval,
storage and control of half-inch type cartridge tapes (8490,
3480, 3590/E), DLT (4000, 7000, and 8000) and 8mm (AIT) type
cartridges. If the library is configured for 8mm cartridges, no
other cartridge type may be used in the library.
The Scalar 1000 configuration can contain a maximum of 4
frames. The Scalar 1000 consists of a Control Module and up
to 3 Expansion Modules. Refer to Figure 2-1 on page 2-4 for an
illustration of a basic Control and Expansion Module. The
Control Module contains library control hardware, the
cartridge accessor, an Insert/Eject Station (I/E Station), an
Operator panel, cartridge storage cells and tape drives. The
Expansion Module can contain tape drives and cartridge
storage.
The Scalar 1000 can be configured for 118 to 788 half-inch
storage cells or 237 to 1182 8mm storage cells and 1 to 48
drives. See Table 2-1.
Note
If the ADIC 8590/
IBM 3590 tape
drive is installed
in either the
Control or the
Expansion
Module, the
modules must be
of the large foot
print type. This
can be
accomplished by
having an
Extension Frame
added to a
normal frame
which increases
the depth of the
frame.
01 Aug 2000
Table 2-1
Maximum Number of Drives Within Each Module
High Profile Tape
Drives (3590/DLT)
Low Profile Tape
Drives (DLT/AIT)
Control Module
4
12
Expansion Module
4
12
Module Type
An example of the Scalar 1000 library system with one control
module and one expansion module is illustrated in Figure 2-1
on page 2-4.
Overview
2-3
Figure 2-1
Scalar 1000 Frames
Host Attachment
The Scalar 1000 contains two independent SCSI device
adapters that offer additional flexibility during installation.
The library can be configured with either the High Voltage
Differential (HVD) or Low Voltage Differential/Single Ended
(LVD/SE) SCSI card, depending on the host adapter. Each
SCSI bus must be terminated with the appropriate HVD or
LVD/SE terminator. Although the Scalar 1000 can be attached
to a wide SCSI device it is not a wide SCSI device and the SCSI
ID must be in the range of 0 to 7.
2-4
Description
600561-A
As an alternative, the Scalar 1000 can be network attached
through an Archive Management Unit (AMU) in a main
frame, UNIX, or Windows NT environment. Contact a sales
representative for additional information about using the
AMU.
The Scalar 1000 can also be connected to a Fibre Channel Host
via the ADIC Fibre Channel Router (FCR). The ADIC FCR
provides one or two SCSI parallel bus connections and a Fibre
Channel connection, translating (bridging) the SCSI protocol
between these two media types. Up to six FCR’s can be
installed in each Scalar 1000 frame. Refer to the ADIC Web
site, www.adic.com, for specifications of different ADIC FCR
models.
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
The Remote Management Unit (RMU) resides in each system
and is pre-installed at the factory. The RMU allows remote
access via a Web browser to the library. Microsoft Internet
Explorer version 4.0 and above, as well as Netscape Navigator
versions 4.01, 4.5, and 4.73 are supported by the RMU.
The user is able to remotely access library status, the library
Operator Panel, and Scalar 1000 documentation via the RMU.
The RMU also allows the user to remotely update firmware in
the RMU and the library’s controller, retrieve library
command and logs, and make configuration changes. The
RMU supports Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) version 2.0 and acts as an SNMP-server. The RMU
acquires Tape Alert 3.0 compatibility information from the
library over the serial interface port and sends that
information to a SNMP server. The RMU also detects a power
loss and generates a SNMP trap for notification. Refer to
Remote Management Unit (RMU) on page 4-8 for more
information.
01 Aug 2000
Subsystem Description
2-5
Functional Description
The Scalar 1000 can be installed on a solid or a raised floor.
The cartridge accessor moves cartridges between storage
cells, tape drives and the Insert/Eject Station (I/E Station).
The cartridge accessor includes the gripper. A barcode
scanner on the gripper identifies the cartridges in cells. Refer
to Cartridge Accessor on page 2-12 for additional details. The
Insert/Eject Station allows cartridges to be added to or
removed from the Scalar 1000 without interrupting the
operation of the library. Refer to Insert/Eject Station on page
2-14 for additional information.
STATIC
SENSITIVE
The cartridge storage cells, cartridge accessor, and tape drives
are accessed by opening the door on the front or rear of the
Scalar 1000 module in which the component is found.
Maintenance activities are performed by using this door.
Requests from the host result in cartridge movement in the
library. The primary requests are for loading and unloading
cartridges to and from the tape drives and for inserting and
ejecting cartridges to or from the library. The host maintains
records of the physical location of a tape cartridge volume in
the library. The physical location is also managed by the
library. Each volume can have a machine and operatorreadable external label to identify a volume in the library
during initial inventory and any time a volume is added to the
library. The library stores the physical location of the
cartridge in an inventory database that is based on the
cartridge bar code number (BC).
In addition to requesting movement of cartridges in the
library, the host can request status, performance,
configuration, and cartridge storage information.
Functional Units
The Scalar 1000 consists of the following functional units:
•
Tape Drives
•
Library control hardware
•
Cartridge storage cells
•
Cartridge accessor
•
Insert/Eject Station
Tape Drives
The Scalar 1000 supports the following tape drives:
2-6
Description
600561-A
•
Model 8490 (half inch)
•
Model 8590 (half inch)
•
IBM 3590/E (half inch)
•
Plasmon NCTP (half inch)
•
Model 4001 (DLT)
•
Model 4001S (DLT)
•
Model 7001 (DLT)
•
Model 7001S (DLT)
•
Model 8001S (DLT)
•
AIT3102 (AIT 8mm)
•
AIT5002 (AIT 8mm)
•
AIT5102 (AIT 8mm)
Control Hardware
The library control hardware controls all operations in the
Scalar 1000, including the interaction between the library and
operator and the library and the host. The library control
firmware creates and maintains the Scalar 1000 configuration,
the physical location of the cartridge accessor, and the
inventory of cartridges.
Cartridge Storage
The Scalar 1000 contains cartridge storage cells in all attached
modules in addition to any tape drives installed. The control
module must be the first frame in the library.
Table 2-2 shows the coordinates for the storage cells for
libraries with Firmware 2.24 or earlier installed.
Table 2-2
Storage Cell Coordinates for Firmware 2.24 or Earlier
Frame
Column
Row
01 - 04
A-E
01 - 63
The Frame number can be from 1 to 4, the Columns are letters
A-E in each module, the Rows are numbered from top to
bottom (1 to 42 for half-inch and DLT cartridges and 1 to 63 for
8mm cartridges).
For libraries with Firmware level 2.3 or higher, use the
following coordinate system to locate different elements
(storage cell, drive, etc.) within the library. Refer to Table 2-3
on page 2-8.
01 Aug 2000
Subsystem Description
2-7
Table 2-3
Element
Type
Element Coordinates for Firmware 2.3 or higher
ID
Frame
(Module)
Section
Column
Row
Storage
S
01 - 04
1-4
A-E
01 - 18
I/E Station
I
01
1
A
01 - 18
Drives
D
01 - 04
1-2
A-B
01 - 06
The Element Type can be I for I/E Station, D for Drive, and S
for Storage. The frame number can be from 1 to 4. The Sections
are numbered, for storage, from 1 to 4 top to bottom, and for
drives, 1 to 2 bottom to top. The Columns are letters A-E in
each section, the Rows are numbered 1 to a maximum of 18
from top to bottom depending on the section. Refer to Figure
2-2 on page 2-9.
2-8
Description
600561-A
Drive
Drive
Column Column
A
B
Drive Bay 1
Drive
Drive
Column Column
A
B
Drive Bay - Starts
from bottom to
top
Figure 2-2
Column E
Column D
Column C
Column B
Column A
1x10 or 1x15
Storage Array
Drive Bay 2
5x10 or 5x15 Storage Array
1x10 or 1x15
Storage Array
Column E
Column D
Column C
Column B
1x10 or 1x15
Storage Array
1x10 or 1x15
Storage Array
Column A
5x10 or 5x15 Storage Array
5x12 or 5x18
Storage Array
Storage
Section 3
4x12 or 4x18
Storage Array
Storage
Section 2
Storage
Section 1
Expansion Module
Storage
Section 4
I/E Station
Control Module
Drive Bay 2
Drive
Drive
Column Column
A
B
Drive Bay 1
Drive
Drive
Column Column
A
B
Drive Ports - # of
Drive port:
Low Profile - 3/6
High Profile - 1
Coordinate System
Figure 2-2 on page 2-9 shows additional information that can
be used to identify various fields in the coordinate system.
The Scalar 1000 contains cartridge storage cells in all the
attached modules as follows:
01 Aug 2000
•
For the half inch/DLT module configuration, refer to
Figure 2-3 on page 2-10.
•
For the 8mm module configuration, refer to Figure 2-4 on
page 2-11.
Subsystem Description
2-9
Figure 2-3
2-10
Description
Half Inch Storage Cell
600561-A
Figure 2-4
8mm Storage Cell
To manipulate the media within the library, the host must
reference each movement with source and target
designations. This is done via element addressing, which
specifies precisely which cells within the library are to be
used. Toward that end, the following addressing scheme will
be used for the library. Refer to Table 2-4 on page 2-12 for
libraries with firmware 2.3 or below and Table 2-5 on page
2-12 for libraries with firmware 3.0 or higher.
01 Aug 2000
Subsystem Description
2-11
Table 2-4
Library Element Indexing for Firmware 2.30 or Below
Indexing Range
Element Type
Half-Inch
8mm
Storage
0 - 787
0 - 1181
Insert/Eject Station
788 - 799
1182 - 1199
Drives
800 - 847
1200 - 1247
Cartridge Accessor
848
1248
Table 2-5
Library Element Indexing for Firmware 3.0 or Higher
Element Type
Indexing Range
Storage
0 - 1181
Insert/Eject Station
1182 - 1199
Drives
1200 - 1247
Cartridge Accessor
1248
Cartridge Accessor
The cartridge accessor identifies and moves cartridges
between the storage cells, tape drives and Insert/Eject Station.
See Figure 2-5 on page 2-13.
2-12
Description
600561-A
Figure 2-5
Gripper
The cartridge accessor has:
•
A gripper assembly for mounting a cartridge gripper, and
a barcode scanner.
•
•
01 Aug 2000
A cartridge gripper picks and places cartridges in
storage cells, tape drives or the Insert/Eject station.
A barcode scanner reads the external labels on the
cartridges. The barcode scanner is used during the
inventory and teach processes.
•
A horizontal axis drive for moving the gripper assembly
the length of the rails in the Control Module and the
Expansion Modules.
•
A vertical axis drive for moving the gripper assembly
vertically in the Control Module and the Expansion
Modules.
Subsystem Description
2-13
Insert/Eject Station
The Insert/Eject Station allows insertion and ejection of
cartridges without interrupting the normal operation of the
library.
The I/E Station has a capacity of 12 half-inch cartridges or 18
8mm cartridges. For a Mixed Media library of half-inch and
DLT cartridges, the top 6 slots of the Insert/Eject Station are
reserved for half-inch cartridges and the bottom 6 slots are
reserved for DLT cartridges. Refer to Figure 2-6 on page 2-14.
Figure 2-6
2-14
Description
Insert/Eject Station
600561-A
Tape Cartridge
Each tape cartridge in the Scalar 1000 must have an external
label that is operator and machine readable to identify the bar
code (BC) number. The external label contains a minimum of
5 characters and a maximum of 16 characters for the BC
depending on the operating modes.
The Scalar 1000 can operate in one of three modes:
•
Default Mode - 6 characters
•
Mixed Media Mode - 6 characters, plus a media identifier
•
Extended Mode - 5 to 16 characters, may include media
identifiers and checksum values.
The BC is composed of uppercase A-Z characters and numeric
0-9 characters. The Scalar 1000 currently supports Code 39
and Storage Technology type labels.
In Mixed Media mode, a separate seventh character label must
be used to identify the cartridge type. The cartridge type is a
single character that is either separate from or included with
the BC label as follows:
•
The separate character 1 is used to identify the Model 3480
cartridge.
•
The separate character E is used to identify the Model
8490, and IBM 3490E cartridges.
•
The separate character J is used to identify the IBM 3590
cartridge.
•
The separate character M is used to identify the Plasmon
NCTP cartridge.
•
The characters C, D, and E are used to identify the Model
4001, Model 4001S, Model 7001, Model 7001S, and Model
8001S cartridges where C means DLT CompacTape III, D
means DLT CompacTape IV, and E means DLT
CompacTape IIIXT. The C, D, or E character is included
on the same label with the six character BC.
•
8mm media bar code labels do not support a media
identifier at this time. However, the Scalar 1000
designates the character A as a media identifier for
reporting purposes.
For additional information, refer to Barcode Labels on page 6-7.
01 Aug 2000
Tape Cartridge
2-15
Cartridge Storage and Tape Drive
Configurations
Cartridge storage quantity varies by number of modules and
tape drives in the modules. Table 2-6 lists the quantity of
media contained by the storage cells for the Control Module
and Expansion Modules configured for the different media
types.
Note
The Scalar 1000
consists of a
Control Module
and up to 3
Expansion
Modules.
Table 2-6
Scalar 1000 Configurations
8490, 8590,
3590, NCTP
Tape Drives
8490, 8590,
3590, NCTP
Cartridge
Capacity
Control
Module
1 to 2
3 to 4
Control
Module
and 1
Expansion
Module
8mm
Tape
Drives
8mm
Cartridge
Capacity
158
118
2 to 12
1 to 2
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
368
328
288
248
Control
Module
and 2
Expansion
Modules
1 to 2
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
9 to 10
11 to 12
578
538
498
458
418
378
Control
Module
and 3
Expansion
Modules
1 to 2
3 to 4
5 to 6
7 to 8
9 to 10
11 to 12
13 to 14
15 to 16
788
748
708
668
628
588
548
508
Frame
DLT Tape
Drives
DLT
Cartridge
Capacity
237
1 to 6
7 to 19
158
118
2 to 12
552
14 to 24
432
1 to 6
7 to 12
13 to 18
19 to 24
368
328
288
248
2 to 12
867
14 to 24
747
26 to 36
627
1 to 6
7 to 12
13 to 18
19 to 24
25 to 30
31 to 36
578
538
498
458
418
378
2 to 12
1182
14 to 24
1062
26 to 36
942
38 to 48
822
1 to 6
7 to 12
13 to 18
19 to 24
25 to 30
31 to 36
37 to 42
43 to 48
788
148
708
668
628
588
548
508
When mixing high profile drive technology with DLT, the
Control Module must be configured for high profile drive
technology while DLT will consume separate expansion
modules.
2-16
Description
600561-A
Optional Features
Optional features for the Scalar 1000 are as follows:
01 Aug 2000
•
ADIC Fibre Channel Router (FCR)
•
Dual DC Power Supplies
Optional Features
2-17
2-18
Description
600561-A
3
Safety
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Hazard Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Area of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Library Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Mechanical Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Main Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-2
Safety
600561-A
3-
Overview
Avoid dangerous situations while operating the Scalar 1000
by following all safety procedures and operating the
equipment carefully. Read and follow all instructions in this
guide.
Note
In addition to the
safety
instructions in
this guide, local
and professional
safety rules
apply.
It is mandatory that operators of the Scalar 1000 library
understand and comply with all instructions contained in this
guide and other related documentation.
Intended Use
This equipment is designed for processing:
•
Magnetic tape cartridges
Any other application is not considered the intended use.
ADIC shall not be held liable for damage arising from
unauthorized use of the library. The user assumes all risk in
this aspect.
Hazard Alert Messages
ADIC classifies hazards in several categories. Table 3-1 shows
the relationship of the symbols, signal words, actual hazards,
and possible consequences.
Table 3-1
Symbol
Hazard Alert Message
Damage to ...
Signal Word
Definition
Consequence
DANGER
Imminent hazardous
situation
Death or serious
injury
WARNING
Potential hazardous
situation
Possible death or
serious injury
CAUTION
Less hazardous
situation
Possible minor or
moderate injury
Imminent hazardous
electrical situation
Death or serious
injury
Persons
Persons
01 Aug 2000
Overview
3-3
Table 3-1
Symbol
Hazard Alert Message
Damage to ...
Signal Word
Definition
Consequence
Material
Caution
Potential damaging
situation
Person
Warning
Potential hazardous
situation
Possible damage
to the product or
environment
Possible death or
serious injury
Material
Static
Sensitive
Potential electronic
damaging situation
Possible damage
to the product
Tips for operators
No hazardous or
damaging
consequences
Important or useful
information
No hazardous or
damaging
consequences
Note
Specially emphasized paragraphs in this guide warn of
danger or draw attention to important information. These
paragraphs and their associated symbols include:
The danger exists of a fatal electric shock. At places
designated with this symbol, electrical current can be
present. Before starting any work, always confirm that all
electrical connections are free of electrical current.
Caution
Warning
When used with the signal word Warning, this symbol
warns of a dangerous situation that threatens personnel
with serious injury or death.
Caution
When used with the signal word Caution, this symbol
means that specific regulations, rules, notices, and working
procedures must be observed. Ignoring this symbol can lead
to equipment damage or destruction or to other property
damage.
STATIC
SENSITIVE
3-4
This symbol indicates the presence of a laser.
Caution - use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
Safety
This symbol indicates that the risk of equipment damage
exists due to static discharge.
600561-A
Note
This symbol draws attention to user tips. No dangerous or
damaging consequences for personnel or property are
associated with this symbol.
This symbol indicates important or useful information. No
dangerous or damaging consequences for personnel or
property are associated with this symbol.
Area of Application
Note
Other
manufacturer
documentation is
an integral part of
the Scalar 1000
documentation
set.
This information applies to the entire Scalar 1000 family.
Further safety instructions for components used in the
equipment are not invalidated by these instructions.
Protective Devices
The Scalar 1000 is equipped with the following protective
devices:
•
Monitored access to the library
•
Main Power Switch
Library Access
The Scalar 1000 is completely surrounded by an enclosure.
The library can only be accessed through monitored access
door(s).
The enclosure around the library separates the danger area of
the Scalar 1000 library from the normal working area. The
danger area of the library is the area in which personnel can
be injured by component movements.
Warning
Movements of mechanical components in the library can
cause serious injury. Access to the library is restricted to
authorized personnel only.
Mechanical Lock
The library access door(s) can only be opened with a key from
the outside. Authorized personnel are responsible for the
security of the key.
01 Aug 2000
Area of Application
3-5
Main Power Switch
Switching off the Main Power Switch removes all power and
causes the movement electronics to shut off. All movements
of the accessor stop immediately. In case of danger to
personnel or property, immediately switch off the Main
Power Switch.
3-6
Caution
Except in emergencies, stop the Scalar 1000 with the normal
shutdown procedure before switching off the Main Power
Switch. ADIC is not responsible for damage caused by
improper use of the Main Power Switch. Such risk lies
entirely with the user.
Warning
Movements of mechanical components in the Scalar 1000
can cause serious injury. Before turning the Main Power
Switch on and restarting the Scalar 1000, confirm that no
danger exists to personnel or property.
Safety
600561-A
4
Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Remote Management Unit (RMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
System Administrator Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Menu Structure Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Left Navigation Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Top Information Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Center Navigation Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Scalar 1000 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Scalar 1000 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Normal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Scalar 1000 Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-2
Operation
600561-A
4-
Overview
Normally, the host issues commands to the Scalar 1000.
Operator control is provided via the Operator Panel. The
Operator is responsible for:
•
Starting the Scalar 1000
•
Shutting down the Scalar 1000
•
Handling Media
Refer to Inserting Media on page 6-3 and Ejecting Media on
page 6-4 for media handling procedures. In the case of
equipment failures, the operator can perform media
processing.
Operator Panel
The Operator Panel provides an interactive path between the
Operator and the Scalar 1000. Visual indicators and pushbuttons enable the Operator to control the Scalar 1000. Refer
to Figure 4-1 on page 4-4 for an illustration of the Operator
Panel.
01 Aug 2000
Overview
4-3
4 X 20 LCD Panel
Speaker Vent
Figure 4-1
4-4
Description
Operator Panel
600561-A
Table 4-1 provides an illustration and description of the push
buttons associated with the Operator Panel.
Table 4-1
Push button
Operator Panel Push Buttons
Description
The Up Arrow push button can be used to:
• scroll the display to show previous line(s).
• move the cursor to an item before the current item when selecting an option,
selection is represented by the character >.
• increment the current value to the next value when used in an entry field.
The Down Arrow push button can be used to:
• scroll the display to show next line(s).
• move the cursor to an item after the current item when selecting an option,
selection is represented by the character >.
• decrement the current value to the previous value when used in an entry
field.
The Enter push button can be used to:
• select the current option as the next action to be performed by the library,
the selected option will be preceded by the character >.
• act as a TAB button to the next required entry field when multiple field
entries are being entered. In this case, the button will cycle through all the
entry locations until the Accept option is chosen (with Y).
The Escape push button can be used to:
• leave the current display and return to the previous display, if it exists.
• move from the Initial Screen to the Main Menu.
The Help push button can be used to:
• display help text for the current selected item if available. In this mode, the
Arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the help text and the Escape
button is used to exit the help display.
01 Aug 2000
Operator Panel
4-5
Table 4-1
Push button
Operator Panel Push Buttons (Continued)
Description
The Ready push button can be used to:
• transition the library from a Ready state to NotReady or NotReady to the
Ready state.
Holding down the push buttons will cycle through the
options. The longer the push button is held down, the faster it
will cycle.
Table 4-2 provides an illustration and description of the visual
indicators on the Operator Panel.
Table 4-2
Indicator
Operator Panel Visual Indicators
Description
The Locked indicator is illuminated when the Insert/Eject Station is locked.
While locked, no media may be added or removed through the Insert/Eject
Station.
The Power On indicator indicates that power is applied to the Scalar 1000
module.
The Ready indicator illuminates when the Scalar 1000 is ready to accept
commands and execute accessor movements.
4-6
Description
600561-A
The meaning of the special characters displayed on the
Operator Panel are as follows:
>
When this character precedes the option, the option is
available for selection. Pressing the
button
selects the option. Pressing the
button presents
informative text about the option. Pressing the
or
button selects between the respective previous or
next option.
...
When these characters follow the option, additional
options or status displays are presented after the
selected option.
When this character follows the option, additional
menus are available under the selected option.
01 Aug 2000
<
When this character follows the option, scroll
predefined values with the
and
buttons for
the selected option.
^
When this character appears below that option, scroll
predefined values with the
and
buttons for
the selected option.
Operator Panel
4-7
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
The RMU resides in each system and is pre-installed at the
factory. (Please contact ADIC for pricing and installation on
this option for all chassises manufactured prior to August
2000.) The RMU allows remote access via a Web browser to
the library. The RMU supports Microsoft Internet Explorer
version 4.0 and above, as well as Netscape Navigator versions
4.01, 4.5, and 4.73. All available functions, as described below,
are accomplished without the need of a dedicated server (or
separate software).
The RMU performs the following functions:
•
Allows the user to quickly access the status of the system,
including library and drive conditions, firmware levels
and other useful information.
•
Provides remote operation of all library Operator Panel
(LCD) functions via the Web browser.
•
Updates firmware in the RMU and the library’s
controller.
•
Supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
version 2.0 and acts as an SNMP-server, generating
SNMP traps and responding to SNMP requests.
•
Acquires Tape Alert 3.0 compatibility information from
the library over the serial interface port and sends that
information to a SNMP server.
•
Detects a power loss and generates a SNMP trap for
notification.
•
Allows for the retrieval of the library command and error
logs and the RMU error log.
•
Allows an administrator to make configuration changes
such as network, users, and date/time changes.
•
Provides on-line access to Scalar 1000 documentation.
Refer to RMU Submenu on page 5-93 for additional
information.
If the RMU is an upgrade to an existing chassis and is
installed into the Scalar 1000 by anyone other than an ADIC
authorized service representative, the 3 year RMU warranty
and 1 year chassis warranty is void.
4-8
Description
600561-A
System Administrator Responsibilities
The System Administrator (SA) must setup the RMU for
proper operation. The SA responsibilities includes
establishing a network address for the RMU and establishing
the Uniform Resource Locators (URL). The network address
consists of an Internet Protocol (IP) address, subnet mask, and
gateway IP Address. Refer to RMU Submenu on page 5-93 for
information about setting the network address via the
Operator Panel. After the network address has been
established, the SA should test the RMU and URL via a Web
browser. Once the URL has been verified and accounts have
been created, the SA can broadcast the URL address to the
potential RMU users. The SA can delete users and change any
user password.
Menu Structure Description
The RMU startup dialog, Figure 4-2 on page 4-11, is divided
into two navigation frame segments and a single information
frame segment. The first of three illustrated segment
descriptions is the left navigation frame. The left navigation
frame has six hyperlinks as indicated in the following list:
•
Logout
•
Contents
•
Documentation
•
Support
•
Version
•
www.adic.com
Refer to Left Navigation Frame on page 4-12 for the dialogs and
hyperlink descriptions.
The second segment is the top information frame. There are no
hyperlinks or subsequent dialogs for this frame. One field
value associated with this frame follows:
•
URL identifier and equipment type
Refer to Top Information Frame on page 4-17 for the dialog.
The third segment is the center navigation frame. The center
navigation frame has six tab style hyperlinks as indicated in
the following list:
01 Aug 2000
•
Status
•
Configuration
•
Firmware
•
Diagnostic file
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-9
•
Operator Panel
•
Logs
The Status Tab is an open dialog. The remaining five tabs,
which are password protected. These tabs require a valid user
or administrator account and a successful login.
Refer to Center Navigation Frame on page 4-18 for the dialogs
and hyperlink descriptions.
4-10
Description
600561-A
Startup Display
Figure 4-2
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-11
4-12
Description
600561-A
Description
This hyperlink logs out the current user and returns to the Status dialog.
This hyperlink opens a new page and displays a brief description of the Status,
Configuration, Firmware, Diagnostic files, Operator Panel, and Logs tabs. Refer to
Figure 4-3 on page 4-13.
This hyperlink opens a new page for the ADIC web site, redirects the user, and displays the
library documentation file hyperlink. Refer to Figure 4-4 on page 4-14.
This hyperlink opens a new page and displays the Support web page where additional
hyperlinks direct the user to the ATAC support center. Refer to Figure 4-5 on page 4-15.
This hyperlink opens a new page and displays the current version information about the
RMU application. Refer to Figure 4-6 on page 4-16.
This hyperlink opens a new page and redirects the user to the ADIC web site home page.
Hyperlink
Logout
Contents
Documentation
Support
Version
www.adic.com
The Left Navigation Frame dialog and descriptions are indicated below.
Left Navigation Frame
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
Help Content :
•
Status
The status page shows the current status of the Remote Management
Unit, the attached library, and any drives within that library. From this
page the user can easily see if there are any problems with the system.
•
Configuration (Password Protected)
The configuration page allows the user to configure the Remote
Management Unit. Network configuration (including SNMP), user
configuration, and date/time setup are all on this page.
•
Firmware (Password Protected)
The firmware page allows the user to update the firmware on both the
Remote Management Unit and the attached library.
•
Diagnostic Files (Password Protected)
The diagnostic files page allows the user to up load (to their local
computer) the diagnostic information from the attached library that
may be useful to service personnel in diagnosing problems. Both
information from the library (command and error logs) and information
from the RMU (error log) can be retrieved in text form. The system
snapshot is a machine decodable file which can only be used by ADIC
service personnel.
•
Operator Panel (Password Protected)
The operator panel page is a direct interface to the attached library’s
operator panel. The user will see what is happening on the attached
library and any interaction the user performs (button presses) will
reflect both on this web page and the attached library.
•
Logs (Password Protected)
The logs page shows the last few entries of the library’s log. To see the
entire log, please download it using the Diagnostic Files page.
Notes:
1. Usernames and passwords are case sensitive.
Figure 4-3
01 Aug 2000
Help Content Dialog
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-13
4-14
Description
600561-A
Figure 4-4
Scalar 1000 Documentation Files Dialog
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-15
Description
This hyperlink opens an email dialog to ADIC technical support center for North America.
This hyperlink opens an email dialog to ADIC technical support center for the remainder of
the world.
ADIC Technical Assistance Center
atac@adic.fr
Technical Support Dialog
Hyperlink
Figure 4-5
4-16
Description
600561-A
Figure 4-6
Version Dialog
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-17
Description
This location indicates the URL identifier of the RMU site and the attached library type.
Hyperlink
Name
The Top Information Frame dialog and description are indicated below.
Top Information Frame
4-18
Description
600561-A
All of the Center Navigation Frame dialogs and descriptions, beginning with Status, are indicated below.
Center Navigation Frame
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-19
This field value indicates the type and quantity of tape drives currently installed in the attached library.
This field value indicates the name and location of the current user.
This field value indicates the Hostname used for the RMU connection.
This field value indicates the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the RMU connection.
This field value indicates the MAC address of the RMU. This is also the serial number of the RMU.
This field value indicates the library serial number.
This field value indicates the state of the SNMP Alert notification. This value is either On/Off.
This field value indicates the current level of library firmware.
This field value indicates the current level of RMU firmware.
Drive Status
RMU User
Hostname
IP Address
MAC Address
Library Serial #
SNMP Alerts
Library Firmware
RMU Firmware
No regular user can log into the RMU while an existing Admin user is logged into the RMU. Only one
regular user can be logged into the RMU at a time.
Clicking any tab, other than the Status tab, initiates a Login dialog. Refer to Figure 4-7 on page 4-20.
This field indicates the current online/offline library status.
The Status tab displays the current summary status of the library. This tab is active even when a user is
not logged into the RMU. The tab is not password protected. The fields and values that are associated
with this tab are indicated below. This screen is refreshed periodically to reflect the current states.
Status
Library Status
Description
Hyperlink
Login Dialog
Figure 4-7
4-20
Description
600561-A
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-21
The user enters his/her user name.
The user enters his/her password.
The user submits the name and password for login verification. If either user name or user password are
not verified, the login is reject.
Enter Login Name
Enter your password
Submit
The RMU is a direct interface to the attached library. The user will see what is happening on the attached
library and any interaction the user performs (button presses) will reflect both on this web page and the
attached library.
No regular user can log into the RMU while an existing Admin user is logged into the RMU. Only one
regular user can be logged into the RMU at a time.
Description
Field
4-22
Description
600561-A
Figure 4-8
Configuration Dialog
The Configuration dialogs and descriptions are indicated below.
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-23
This section allows the user to enter a new User Name.
This pull-down menu allows the user to select a user name that has already been created. Only the
current user name is listed unless the SA is logged on.
Select One
This section allows the user to perform management actions on the user selected.
Edit New
User Name
This selection indicates that the current user will be deleted. This can only be done by the SA.
This pull down menu allows the user to select the type of action to be accomplished.
Management Action
Delete User
This field value indicates the SNMP server address.
SNMP Server
This selection indicates that the user password will be changed.
This field value indicates the state of the SNMP Alert notification. The value is either On/Off.
SNMP Alerts
Change User Password
This field value indicates the Gateway address used for RMU communication.
Gateway
This selection indicates that a new user is to be created. This can only be done by the SA.
This field value indicates what subnet an IP address belongs to.
Subnet Mask
Create User
This field value indicates the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the RMU connection.
IP Address
This selection indicates that no change should be made.
This field value allows enabling/disabling DHCP as the protocol for assigning dynamic IP
addresses. The value is either On/Off.
DHCP
No Action
This field value indicates the Hostname used for the RMU configuration.
The Configuration tab displays the current configuration status of the RMU and user account. The
fields and values that are associated with this tab are indicated below.
Configuration
Hostname
Description
Hyperlink
4-24
Description
600561-A
The user types his password in again for verification.
This field value allows the user to change the current date.
This field value allows the user to change the current time.
The user submits the configuration data for verification and allows the user to confirm any
configuration changes.
This button will clear all the changed fields.
Re-enter Password
Date (mm/dd/yy)
Time (hh:mm)
Submit
Reset
If the user changes the configuration, the Confirm Configuration Changes dialog appears. This dialog displays
the old configuration. Refer to Figure 4-9 on page 4-25.
The user enters his password.
Password
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-25
Figure 4-9
Confirm Configuration Changes Dialog
4-26
Description
600561-A
This button confirms the configuration changes.
Confirm
When the user enables DHCP, the DHCP Enabled dialog is displayed. Refer to Figure 4-10 on page 4-27.
The user must enter their password.
Description
Password
Hyperlink
DHCP Enabled Dialog
Figure 4-10
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-27
4-28
Description
600561-A
Figure 4-11
Firmware Dialog
The Firmware dialog and descriptions are indicated below.
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-29
The Firmware tab updates the firmware version of the RMU or the library. The fields and values that
are associated with this tab are indicated below
This section allows the user to select which firmware is to be upgraded.
This section allows the user to select or browse to find the firmware upgrade file.
When this button is clicked, the upgrade firmware process is started.
Firmware
Select target for update
Select firmware file
Update Firmware
The RMU is a direct interface to the attached library. The user will see what is happening on the attached
library and any interaction the user performs (button presses) will reflect both on this web page and the
attached library.
Description
Hyperlink
4-30
Description
600561-A
Figure 4-12
Diagnostics File Dialog
The Diagnostic file dialog and descriptions are indicated below.
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-31
This selection allows the user to choose which log to retrieve.
After selecting the log, click on this button to retrieve the log file.
Retrieve selected files
The Diagnostic files tab displays the library command error log, library error log, or RMU error log.
The fields and values that are associated with this tab are indicated below:
Diagnostic file
Select the file to
retrieve
Description
Hyperlink
4-32
Description
600561-A
Figure 4-13
Operator Panel Dialog
The Operator panel dialog and descriptions are indicated below.
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-33
The Previous button can be used to:
Previous
Enter
Next
Ready
Escape
The Operator panel tab displays the library operator and duplicates operator panel functionality. Access to this
menu does not lock out the library’s front panel. The current state of the library menu is echoed and
continuously refreshed on the display. The fields and values that are associated with this tab are indicated below
Operator panel
• select the current option as the next action to be performed by the library, the selected option will be proceeded
by the character >
• acts as a TAB button to the next required entry field when multiple field entries are being entered. In this case,
the button will cycle through all the entry locations until the Accept option is chosen (with Y)
The Enter button can be used for:
• scroll the display to show the next line(s)
• move the cursor to an item after the current item when selecting an option, selecting is represented by the
character >
• decrement the current value to the previous value when used in an entry field
The Next button can be used to:
• transition the library from a Ready state to NotReady or NotReady to the Ready state
The Ready button can be used to:
• leave the current display and return to the previous display, if it exists
• move from the Initial Screen to the Main Menu
The Escape button can be used to:
• scroll the display to show previous line(s)
• move the cursor to an item before the current item when selecting an option, selection is represented by the
character >
• increment the current value to the next value when used in an entry field
Description
Hyperlink
4-34
Description
600561-A
Help
• display help text for the current selected item if available. In this mode, the Previous and Next buttons can be
used to scroll through the help text and the Escape button is used to exit the help display
The Help button can be used to:
01 Aug 2000
Remote Management Unit (RMU)
4-35
Figure 4-14
Logs Dialog
The Logs dialog and descriptions are indicated below.
4-36
Description
600561-A
Description
The Logs tab displays the library logs.
Hyperlink
Logs
Scalar 1000 Startup
Use the following procedure to start the Scalar 1000.
Caution
Warning
With the RMU installed, Power Up must be delayed by at
least 10 seconds after a power down condition to allow the
RMU to properly shutdown.
Step 1
Ensure that all doors are closed and mechanically
locked on the Control Module and any Expansion
Modules.
Step 2
Locate the Main Power Switch at the lower right
corner in the back panel door of the Control
Module.
Step 3
Push in the top of the rocker Main Power Switch on
the Control Module. Repeat the process for any
Expansion Modules.
Movements of mechanical components in the Scalar 1000
can cause serious injury. Before turning the Main Power
Switch ON, confirm that no danger exists to personnel or
property.
Power is applied to the Scalar 1000. The Control Module
embedded software starts the boot process. The
(Power On) indicator illuminates and the Initial Screen
displays status.
The firmware initiates a self test procedure and an
auto-configuration and inventory operation. After all
firmware procedures are completed, the LCD screen on
the Operator Panel displays the Initial Screen. The Initial
Screen is illustrated by Figure 4-15.
MAIN SCREEN
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Idle
Online.........Ready
Figure 4-15
01 Aug 2000
Initial Screen
Scalar 1000 Startup
4-37
Scalar 1000 Shutdown
The Scalar 1000 may be shut down normally or by the
Emergency Shutdown method.
Attention
Use the method described in Emergency Shutdown in cases
of emergency only.
Normal Shutdown
To properly shut down the Scalar 1000 follow the procedure.
Caution
With the RMU installed, power up must be delayed by at
least 10 seconds after a power down condition to allow the
RMU to properly shutdown.
Step 1
If necessary, use the
button to return to the
Main Menu. The selector defaults to the Mode
selection. Press the
button. From the Mode
screen, use the
button to select the Shutdown
mode.
Press the
button.
The * moves to the Shutdown mode and the state
automatically changes to Shutdown. The Accessor
completes the current task and returns to the home
position. The reboot message appears. See Figure 4-16.
The library may now
be rebooted
Figure 4-16
Reboot Screen
Step 2
Locate the Main Power Switch at the lower right
corner in the back panel door of the Control
Module.
Step 3
Push in the bottom of the rocker Main Power
Switch.
Power is removed from the Scalar 1000 Control Module.
4-38
Description
600561-A
Step 4
Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for each additional
Expansion Module.
Emergency Shutdown
Use the following procedure if an emergency situation arises.
Attention
Except in emergencies, stop the Scalar 1000 with the normal
shutdown procedure before switching off the Main Power
Switch. ADIC is not responsible for damage caused by
improper use of the Main Power Switch. All risk lies
entirely with the user.
Caution
With the RMU installed, power up must be delayed by at
least 10 seconds after a power down condition to allow the
RMU to properly shutdown.
Step 1
Locate the Main Power Switch at the lower right
corner in the back door panel of the Control
Module.
Step 2
Push in the bottom of the rocker the Main Power
Switch.
Power is removed from the Scalar 1000. All Accessor
movements halt immediately.
Step 3
Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for any additional
Expansion Module.
Scalar 1000 Restart
Use the following procedure to restart the Scalar 1000.
Caution
01 Aug 2000
With the RMU installed, power up must be delayed by at
least 10 seconds after a power down condition to allow the
RMU to properly shutdown.
Step 1
If applicable, correct any situations that required
the Scalar 1000 shutdown.
Step 2
Refer to Scalar 1000 Startup on page 4-37 for
instructions on the Scalar 1000 start procedure.
Scalar 1000 Restart
4-39
4-40
Description
600561-A
5
Menus and
Commands
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Using the Operator Panel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Common Help Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Operator Intervention Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Main Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Mode Dialog Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Status Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Mode Parms Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Element Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Mixed Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Reservations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Elements Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Command Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Drive Error Log Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Media Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Commands Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Move Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Eject Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Eject Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Database Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Learn Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Manipulate Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Manipulate Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Setup Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Target ID Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Parity Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Ports Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Host Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Security Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Switching Security From Off to On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Switching Security From On to Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
RMU Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Name/DHCP Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
IP Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
View Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Utils Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Unload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
5-2
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Initialize Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
SCSI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129
Service Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Start Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Diags Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Loopback Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Sensors Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
Wrap Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Locks Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Get/Put Storage Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Get/Put Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Adjust Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Trigger Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Fiducial Test Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Move Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
Step Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164
PowerSup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Status Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175
Drive Mounts Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
Other Functions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176
About Screen Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
01 Aug 2000
5-3
5-4
Menus and Commands
600561-A
5-
Overview
The Operator Panel provides a menu driven operator
interface to the Scalar 1000. The menus allow selection of
parameters and information regarding the status and current
operating parameters of the Scalar 1000.
Using the Operator Panel Menu
Note
The information
menus are not
dynamically
updated. To view
changes, reselect
the menu that
was changed.
01 Aug 2000
Each menu is accessible through the Operator Panel push
buttons. Refer to Operator Panel on page 4-3 for an illustration
and definition of the push buttons.
All menus and respective options are grouped according to
function. Each respective option is preceded and/or followed
by special characters. Figure 5-1 on page 5-6 shows the
Operator Panel directory structure.
Overview
5-5
Directory Structure
Figure 5-1
5-6
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Common Help Button
The Help key is common to all menus, submenus, dialogs, and
screens. Using the Help key while the selection indicator
(< or >) is at a desired location, provides informative text
about that entry. To use the Help button, follow these steps.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
button or the
button
to position the selection indicator at the desired
location.
Step 2
Press the
button to view the help text.
The help text appears.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The previous menu appears with the selection indicator
located at the default position.
Operator Intervention Message
If an error condition causes an operator intervention message
to appear, refer to Table 7-3 on page 7-15.
01 Aug 2000
Using the Operator Panel Menu
5-7
Main Menu Selection
Note
The
button
can always be
used to escape to
the previous
menu.
The Main Menu is the first available menu after the Initial
Screen displays. Refer to Scalar 1000 Startup on page 4-37 for
information about the Initial Screen. To display the Main
Menu from the Initial Screen or any other menu, press the
button until the Main Menu appears. The Main Menu
defaults to the Mode selection. All subsequent menus and
options are selectable from the Main Menu. Eight options are
available. See Figure 5-2 for an illustration of the Main Menu.
>Mode...
Status
Commands
Database
Figure 5-2
5-8
Menus and Commands
Setup
Utils
Service
About...
Main Menu
600561-A
Mode Dialog Selection
The Mode Dialog is primarily used to change the operating
mode of the Scalar 1000 for startup, shutdown, or diagnostic
operations. Mode is selected from the Main Menu by
following this procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
The Main Menu appears with the selection indicator
positioned at Mode.
Step 2
Press the
button.
The Mode Dialog appears. See Figure 5-3. The first line
of the Mode Dialog displays the current state.
Offline
>Online
Ready
.......
Ready
Accept: N
Figure 5-3
Mode Dialog
To choose one of the selections, follow the steps.
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
If Shutdown is
selected for the
Mode parameter,
Shutdown is
automatically
displayed for the
State parameter.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Mode
Online
Offline
Shutdown
State
Ready
NotReady
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Mode Dialog Selection
5-9
Press the
Step 4
button to confirm the change.
Repeat Step 3 for the desired parameters in the list.
When toggling between the Ready and NotReady states,
the following two screens, refer to Figure 5-4 on page
5-10 and Figure 5-5 on page 5-10, appear. When
Shutdown is selected, the Shutdown Screen appears. See
Figure 5-6.
Changing state to:
>READY<
Figure 5-4
Ready Screen
Changing state to:
>NOT READY<
Figure 5-5
NotReady Screen
The library can now
be rebooted
Figure 5-6
Shutdown Screen
Table 5-1 details the state and mode descriptions available
under the Mode screen.
5-10
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Table 5-1
State
Ready
Not Ready
Shutdown
01 Aug 2000
Operating State and Mode
Mode
Description
Online
The normal host controlling condition. Host commands are
processed.
Offline
The normal operator controlling condition. Operator
commands are processed. Most host commands are not
processed.
Online
Aisle power is not present. Host commands not involving the
accessor are processed.
Offline
Aisle power is not present. Most operator and host commands
are not processed.
Shutdown
Allows the operator to properly shutdown the library. All
commands issued by the host are completed, and no other
commands are accepted.
Mode Dialog Selection
5-11
Status Menu Selection
The Status Menu is primarily used to provide various
operating statistics. Status is selected from the Main Menu
by following this procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
The Main Menu appears with the indicator positioned at
Mode.
Step 2
Press the
button or the
button to position
the selection indicator at Status.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The Status Menu appears. This menu offers two
selections. See Figure 5-7. The Status Menu defaults to
the Library selection.
>Library
Drives
Figure 5-7
Status Menu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 4
Press the
Submenu.
button to select the Library
— or —
Press the
button or the
Drives Submenu.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Library Submenu
on page 5-13 or Drives Submenu on page 5-37.
5-12
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Library Submenu
When Library is selected, the Library Submenu is displayed.
This submenu offers four selections. See Figure 5-8. The
Library Submenu defaults to the SCSI selection.
>SCSI
System...
Element...
Logs
Figure 5-8
Library Submenu
To choose one of the four selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the SCSI Submenu. .
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
System Dialog, Element Dialog, or Logs Submenu.
Press the
button.
The selected screen appears. Refer to SCSI Submenu on
page 5-14, System Dialog on page 5-26, Elements
Dialog on page 5-28, or Logs Submenu on page 5-32.
01 Aug 2000
Status Menu Selection
5-13
SCSI Submenu
When SCSI is selected, the SCSI Submenu is displayed. This
submenu offers two selections. See Figure 5-9. The SCSI
Submenu defaults to the Mode Parms selection.
>Mode Parms...
Reservations...
Figure 5-9
SCSI Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Mode Parms
— or —
Press the
button or the
Reservations Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Mode Parms Dialog
on page 5-15 or Reservations Dialog on page 5-24.
5-14
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Mode Parms Dialog
When Mode Parms is selected, the Mode Parms Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-10. This option is used to view the
changeable Mode Parameter pages. Refer to the document
number 600974 Scalar 1000 SCSI Reference Manual for
additional information about the Scalar 1000 Mode
Parameters.
Select Mode Parms:
ELEMENT ADDRESS <
and Type: CURRENT
Accept: N
Figure 5-10
Mode Parms Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Mode Parms
Element Address
Mixed Media
Parity
LCD
Type
Current
Default
Saved
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the change.
Repeat Step 1 for the desired parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, one of
twelve response screens appears. Refer to Figure 5-11 on
page 5-16 through Figure 5-22 on page 5-23. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Status Menu Selection
5-15
Element Address
When Element Address is selected, the Element Address
screen appears. Figure 5-11 shows the Element Address/
Current Screen. Figure 5-12 shows the Element Address/
Default Screen. Figure 5-13 on page 5-17 shows the Element
Address/Saved Screen.
Base
Base
Base
Base
Figure 5-11
5-16
Menus and Commands
:
:
:
:
00001
04096
00016
00256
Element Address/Current Screen
Base
Base
Base
Base
Figure 5-12
MT
ST
IE
DT
Parameters
Values
Base MT
Current base address of the
accessor
Base ST
Current base address of the
Storage Cells
Base IE
Current base address of the
Insert/Eject station
Base DT
Current base address of the
tape drive(s)
MT
ST
IE
DT
:
:
:
:
00001
04096
00016
00256
Element Address/Default Screen
Parameters
Values
Base MT
Default base address of the
accessor
Base ST
Default base address of the
Storage Cells
Base IE
Default base address of the
Insert/Eject station
600561-A
Base DT
Base
Base
Base
Base
Figure 5-13
MT
ST
IE
DT
:
:
:
:
Default base address of the
tape drive(s)
00001
04096
00016
00256
Element Address/Saved Screen
Parameters
Values
Base MT
Saved base address of the
accessor
Base ST
Saved base address of the
Storage Cells
Base IE
Saved base address of the
Insert/Eject station
Base DT
Saved base address of the tape
drive(s)
Mixed Media
When Mixed Media is selected, the Mixed Media screen
appears. Figure 5-14 shows the Mixed Media/Current Screen.
Figure 5-15 on page 5-18 shows the Mixed Media/ Default
Screen. Figure 5-16 on page 5-19 shows the Mixed Media/
Saved Screen.
Mix Enabled
Extended RES
Extended ASCQ
Extended VolTag
Figure 5-14
01 Aug 2000
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mixed Media/Current Screen
Parameters
Values
Mix Enabled
Yes indicates that the library is
currently operating in mixed
media mode.
No indicates that the library is
currently not operating in
Status Menu Selection
5-17
mixed media mode. While the
library is not operating in
mixed media mode, the
Extended RES, Extended
ASCQ, and Extended VolTag
are not applicable (N/A).
Extended RES
Yes indicates that Extended
Read Element Status is
enabled
No indicates that Extended
Read Element Status is
disabled
Extended ASCQ
Yes indicates that Vendor
Unique Additional Sense
Code Qualifiers are currently
enabled
No indicates that Vendor
Unique Additional Sense
Qualifiers are currently
disabled
Extended VolTag
Yes indicates that the reported
bar code will include media
type identifier
No indicates that the reported
bar code will not include the
media type identifier
Mix Enabled
Extended RES
Extended ASCQ
Extended VolTag
Figure 5-15
5-18
Menus and Commands
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mixed Media/Default Screen
Parameters
Values
Mix Enabled
Yes indicates that mixed
media defaults to enabled
No indicates that mixed media
defaults to disabled. While
Mix Enabled is disabled, the
Extended RES, Extended
ASCQ, and Extended VolTag
are not applicable (N/A).
600561-A
Extended RES
Yes indicates that Extended
Read Element Status defaults
to enabled
No indicates that Extended
Read Element Status defaults
to disabled
Extended ASCQ
Yes indicates that Vendor
Unique Additional Sense Code
Qualifiers default to enabled
No indicates that Vendor
Unique Additional Sense
Qualifiers default to disabled
Extended VolTag
Yes indicates that the reported
bar code will include media
type identifier
No indicates that the reported
bar code will not include the
media type identifier
Mix Enabled
Extended RES
Extended ASCQ
Extended VolTag
Figure 5-16
01 Aug 2000
:
:
:
:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mixed Media/Saved Screen
Parameters
Values
Mix Enabled
Yes indicates that mixed media
is saved as enabled
No indicates that mixed media
is saved as disabled. While Mix
Enabled is disabled, the
Extended RES, Extended
ASCQ, and Extended VolTag
are not applicable (N/A).
Extended RES
Yes indicates that Extended
Read Element Status is saved
as enabled
No indicates that Extended
Read Element Status is saved
as disabled
Status Menu Selection
5-19
Extended ASCQ
Yes indicates that Vendor
Unique Additional Sense
Code Qualifiers are saved as
enabled
No indicates that Additional
Sense Qualifiers are saved as
disabled
Extended VolTag
Yes indicates that the reported
bar code will include media
type identifier
No indicates that the reported
bar code will not include the
media type identifier
Parity
When Parity is selected, the Parity screen appears. Figure
5-17 shows the Parity/Current Screen. Figure 5-18 on page
5-21 shows the Parity/ Default Screen. Figure 5-19 on page
5-21 shows the Parity/Saved Screen.
Parity : Yes
Retries: 001
Figure 5-17
5-20
Menus and Commands
Parity/Current Screen
Parameters
Values
Parity
Yes indicates that SCSI parity
is currently enabled
No indicates that SCSI parity is
currently disabled
Retries
Indicates the current number
of transmission retries
(000 .. 999) due to a SCSI parity
error
600561-A
Parity : Yes
Retries: 001
Figure 5-18
Parity/Default Screen
Parameters
Values
Parity
Yes indicates that SCSI parity
defaults to enabled
No indicates that SCSI parity
defaults to disabled
Retries
Indicates the default number
of transmission retries
(000 .. 999) due to a SCSI parity
error
Parity : Yes
Retries: 001
Figure 5-19
01 Aug 2000
Parity/Saved Screen
Parameters
Values
Parity
Yes indicates that SCSI parity
is saved as enabled
No indicates that SCSI parity is
saved as disabled
Retries
Indicates the saved number of
transmission retries
(000 .. 999) due to a SCSI parity
error
Status Menu Selection
5-21
LCD
When LCD is selected, the LCD screen appears. Figure 5-20
shows the LCD/Current Screen. Figure 5-21 shows the LCD/
Default Screen. Figure 5-22 on page 5-23 shows the LCD/
Saved Screen.
Security: Disabled
Line
: 1<
MAIN SCREEN
(current)
Figure 5-20
Note
Press the
LCD/Current Dialog
Parameters
Values
Security
Disabled indicates that LCD
security is currently disabled
Enabled indicates that LCD
security is currently enabled
Line
Indicates the currently
displayed text line (1 .. 4)
Text
Corresponding line of main
screen text with up to 20
characters
button or the
button to
toggle between
the line number
parameter values.
Security: Disabled
Line
: 1<
MAIN SCREEN
(default)
Figure 5-21
Note
Press the
LCD/Default Dialog
Parameters
Values
Security
Disabled indicates that LCD
security defaults to disabled
Enabled indicates that LCD
security defaults to enabled
Line
Indicates the displayed default
text line (1 .. 4)
button or the
button to
toggle between
the line number
parameter values.
5-22
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Text
Corresponding line of main
screen text with up to 20
characters
Security: Disabled
Line
: 1<
(saved)
Figure 5-22
Note
Press the
LCD/Saved Dialog
Parameters
Values
Security
Disabled indicates that LCD
security is saved as disabled
Enabled indicates that LCD
security is saved as enabled
Line
Indicates the saved displayed
text line (1 .. 4)
Text
Corresponding line of main
screen text with up to 20
characters
button or the
button to
toggle between
the line number
parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
Status Menu Selection
5-23
Reservations Dialog
When Reservations is selected, the Reservations Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-23. This option is used to determine
the state of the element reservations made by a SCSI host, to
reserve elements for exclusive use within a multi initiator
environment.
Bus : 0 <
Host ID : 0
Reservation ID:
Any
Found : 0000
Accept: N
Figure 5-23
Reservation Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Bus
Indicates the SCSI Bus ID
number (0 .. 1)
Host ID
Indicates the Host ID number
(0 .. 7)
Reservation ID
Indicates the host’s reservation
identifier (0x00 .. 0xFF, Any)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
The value of the Found parameter in the
Reservation Dialog is supplied by the library
firmware and can not be changed.
Step 2
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears.
5-24
Menus and Commands
600561-A
See Figure 5-24. Otherwise, the changed parameters
continue to display but no action is taken.
Bus: 0 <
Host ID : 0
ReservationID:
Any
Found : 0109
Accept : N
Figure 5-24
01 Aug 2000
Response Dialog
Parameters
Values
Found
Indicates the number of
reserved elements which
match the Bus, Host ID, and
Reservation ID parameters.
Accept
Y to accept
N to reject
Status Menu Selection
5-25
System Dialog
When System is selected, the System Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-25. This option is used to view the current library
operating statistics.
Cartridges
Free cells
Total gets
Figure 5-25
: 0122
:0036
:00000137
[more]
System Dialog
Step 1
Parameters
Values
Cartridges
Indicates the number of
cartridges in the storage cells
(000 .. 0787 for half inch and
DLT cartridges)
(0000 .. 1181 for 8mm
cartridges)
Free cells
Displays the number of free
cells
(788 - for all cells except 8mm)
(1182 for 8mm cells)
Total gets
The total number of gets from
elements (00000000 - 99999999)
[more]
More information on the
Continuation Screen.
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Continuation
The Continuation Screen appears. See Figure 5-26.
Moves
: 000013225
X meters: 000005187
Y meters: 000011148
[more]
Figure 5-26
5-26
Menus and Commands
Continuation Screen
600561-A
Step 2
Parameters
Values
Moves
Total move media commands
that have been executed
X meters
Total meters traveled by the
accessor in the horizontal
direction
Y meters
Total meters traveled by the
accessor in the vertical
direction
[more]
More information on the
Continuation Screen
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Continuation
The Continuation Screen appears. See Figure 5-27.
Get retries :
Put retries :
Scan Retries:
I/E Closes :
Figure 5-27
01 Aug 2000
000008
000010
000009
000050
Continuation Screen
Parameters
Values
Get retries
Total recovered get operations
Put retries
Total recovered put operations
Scan retries
Total recovered barcode scan
operations
I/E closes
Total times the I/E station has
been closed
Status Menu Selection
5-27
Elements Dialog
When Elements is selected, the Elements Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-28. This option queries the individual
element statistics. Individual element information is tracked
since the last Teach New operation.
Enter Desired
Coord: S< 01 2 A 01
OR Element : 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-28
Element Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
5-28
Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column. (01 .. 12 for
half inch and DLT
coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
600561-A
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-29. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
Status: Full
BC : 0000000000000345
Source: 0100
Valid : Yes
[more]
Figure 5-29
01 Aug 2000
Response Dialog
Parameters
Values
Status
Full indicates that a cartridge
is present in the element
Empty indicates that a
cartridge is not present in the
element
BC
Indicates the barcode label as
found on the cartridge when
the Status indicates Full
Source
Indicates the original location
from which this element came
Valid
Yes indicates that the results
shown are based on an
inventory of the elements
No indicates that the results
shown are not based on an
inventory of the elements
[more]
More information on the
Continuation Screen
Status Menu Selection
5-29
Step 3
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Continuation
The Continuation Screen appears. Refer to Figure 5-30
on page 5-30.
Total Puts : 0000011
Put Retries: 0000000
Get Retries: 0000000
[more]
Figure 5-30
Continuation Screen
Step 4
Parameters
Values
Total Puts
Indicates the total number of
puts (0000000 .. 99999999) that
occurred at this element
Put Retries
Indicates the total number of
put retries
(0000000 .. 99999999) that
occurred at this element
Get Retries
Indicates the total number of
get retries
(0000000 .. 99999999) that
occurred at this element
[more]
More information on the
Continuation Screen
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Continuation
The Continuation Screen appears. See Figure 5-31.
Reserved
:
Reserve ID :
Reserved by:
Figure 5-31
5-30
Menus and Commands
No
N/A
N/A
Continuation Screen
600561-A
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Reserved
Yes indicates the element is
reserved by a SCSI host
No indicates the element is not
reserved. When not reserved,
Reserve ID and Reserved by
parameters are not applicable
(N/A).
Reserve ID
Indicates the reserve ID
Reserved by
Indicates the ID of the
reserving host
Status Menu Selection
5-31
Logs Submenu
When Logs is selected, the Logs Submenu is displayed. This
submenu offers two selections. See Figure 5-32. The Logs
Submenu defaults to the Command Log selection.
>Command Log...
Error Log...
Drive Error Log...
Figure 5-32
Logs Submenu
To choose one of the three selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Command Log
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Error Log Dialog or Drive Error Log Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Command Log
Dialog on page 5-33, Error Log Dialog on page 5-35, or
Drive Error Log Dialog on page 5-37.
5-32
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Command Log Dialog
When Command Log is selected, the Command Log Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-33. This option is used to view a
running history log of library operations. A service
representative can retrieve this data for problem analysis.
11/10/99
18:25:24.88
SCSIDONE INQ : Status
good
Figure 5-33
Command Log Dialog
To choose one of the selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button or the
through the entire log.
button to scroll
— or —
Press the
button to print the command log
If the
button is pressed the response dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-34.
The system is about
to print the log to
the serial port!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-34
Response Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
01 Aug 2000
Status Menu Selection
5-33
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to print the log to the serial
port
N to not print the log to a serial
port
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the two
Response Screens appears. See Figure 5-35 and
Figure 5-36. Otherwise, the changed parameter continue
to display but no action is taken.
Note
These screens
may flash by
quickly.
Requested command is
now in progress...
Figure 5-35
Response Screen
Requested command is
now complete...
Figure 5-36
5-34
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Error Log Dialog
When Error Log is selected, the Error Log Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-37. This option is used to view a
running history log of error conditions that have occurred.
02/19/97
18:25:24.88
Type
:
SW Temp
Error
:
0X02040000
Modifier:
0X00000000
Figure 5-37
Error Log Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button or the
button to scroll
through the Error Log parameters.
Parameters
Values
Type
Indicates the type of error.
Record the error type in Error
Log Codes on page 7-15.
Error
Indicates the error identifier.
Record the error identifier in
Error Log Codes on page 7-15.
Modifier
Indicates the error modifier.
Record the error modifier in
Error Log Codes on page 7-15.
Press the
button to print the error log
If the
button is pressed the response dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-34.
The system is about
to print the log to
the serial port!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-38
01 Aug 2000
Response Dialog
Status Menu Selection
5-35
Step 2
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to print the log to the serial
port
N to not print the log to a serial
port
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the two
Response Screens appears. See Figure 5-35 and
Figure 5-36. Otherwise, the changed parameter continue
to display but no action is taken.
Note
These screens
may flash by
quickly.
Requested command is
now in progress...
Figure 5-39
Response Screen
Requested command is
now complete...
Figure 5-40
5-36
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Drive Error Log Dialog
When Drive Error Log is selected, the Drive Error Log
Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-41. This option is used to
view a history log of drive error conditions.
Note
This command is
not yet available.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT
YET AVAILABLE
Press Escape.
Figure 5-41
Drive Error Log Dialog
Drives Submenu
When Drives is selected, the Drives Submenu is displayed.
This submenu offers two selections. See Figure 5-42. The
Drives Submenu defaults to the Drive State selection.
>Drive State...
Media Info...
Figure 5-42
Drives Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Drive State
— or —
Press the
button or the
Media Info Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected screen appears. Refer to Drive State Dialog
on page 5-38 or Media Info Dialog on page 5-40.
01 Aug 2000
Status Menu Selection
5-37
Drive State Dialog
Note
The library must
be offline.
When Drive State is selected, the Drive State Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-43. This option indicates the current
state of the selected drive.
Drive: 1200<
State: Loaded
Clean Required: No
[more]
Figure 5-43
Drive State Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the Continuation
Screen.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the Drive parameter value in the
following list.
Note
The Continuation
Screen could take
several seconds
to return with the
information.
Parameters
Values
Drive
Indicates the element address
of the desired drive
(01200 .. 01247 for all 8mm and
DLT drives)
(01200-01215 for all half-inch
drives)
[more]
More information on the
Continuation Screen
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Continuation
The value of the State parameter in the Drive State
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
not be changed. The State parameter indicates the
state of the drive (LOADED, UNLOADED,
LOADING, UNLOADING, DRIVE ERROR,
UNKNOWN).
5-38
Menus and Commands
600561-A
The value of the Cleaning Required parameter is
the Drive State Dialog is supplied by the library
firmware and can not be changed. The Cleaning
Required parameter indicated if the drive requires
cleaning (Yes, No).
The Continuation Screen appears. See Figure 5-44.
Ser Num :
Code
:
SCSI ID :
Figure 5-44
01 Aug 2000
CX732M1820
213
120
03
Continuation Screen
Parameters
Values
Ser Num
Indicates the drive serial
number
Code
Indicates the current controller
and drive firmware level of the
drive
SCSI ID
Indicates the current SCSI ID
of the drive (00 .. 15)
Status Menu Selection
5-39
Media Info Dialog
When Media Info is selected, the Media Info Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-45. This option shows media
information in loaded drive elements.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: D 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 01200
Accept: N
Figure 5-45
Element Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
5-40
Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column. (01 .. 12 for
half inch and DLT
coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
600561-A
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-46. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
Type: 6GB DLTIII
Free: 00000000 KB
Write Protected : No
Mounts: 000016
Figure 5-46
01 Aug 2000
Response Screen
Parameters
Values
Type
Indicates the type of drive
media (for DLT: NO TAPE,
UNKNOWN, CLEAN TAPE,
TK50 R0, TK70 R0, 2.6Gb DLT
III, 6Gb DLT IV, 10Gb DLT III,
15Gb DLT IIIXT, 20Gb DLT IV,
35Gb DLTIV, 40Gb DLT IV)
(for 8mm: UNKNOWN, AIT
WRITEABLE, AIT
PARTITIONED, CLEAN
TAPE, AIT MIC)
Free
Indicates the amount of free
space in Kb remaining on the
drive media
Write Protected
Yes indicates that the cartridge
is write protected
No indicates that the cartridge
is not write protected
Mounts
Indicates the number of times
the media has been mounted
into a drive.
Status Menu Selection
5-41
Commands Menu Selection
The Commands Menu is primarily used to access various
Scalar 1000 commands. Commands is selected from the Main
Menu by following this procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
The Main Menu appears with the indicator positioned at
Mode.
Step 2
Press the
button or the
button to position
the selection indicator at Commands.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The Commands Menu appears. This menu offers four
selections. See Figure 5-47. The Commands Menu
defaults to the Park selection.
>Park
Move
Inventory...
Insert/Eject
Figure 5-47
Commands Menu
To choose one of the four selections, follow the
steps.
Step 4
Press the
button to select Park.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Move Submenu, Inventory Dialog, or Insert/Eject
Submenu.
Press the
button.
The selected screen appears. Refer to Park on page 5-43,
Move Submenu on page 5-43, Inventory Dialog on page
5-51 and Insert/Eject Submenu on page 5-54.
5-42
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Park
When Park is selected, the gripper retracts and the accessor
is immediately returned to the home position. The two
Response Screens, see Figure 5-48 and Figure 5-49, appear.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-48
Response Screen
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-49
Response Screen
Move Submenu
Note
The Scalar 1000
must be Offline
and Ready to use
the commands
under the Move
Menu.
When Move is selected, the Move Menu is displayed. This
menu offers two selections. See Figure 5-50. The Move Menu
defaults to the Position to Elem selection.
>Position to Elem...
Move Media...
Figure 5-50
Move Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
01 Aug 2000
Commands Menu Selection
5-43
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Position to Elem
— or —
Press the
button or the
Move Media Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Position to Elem
Dialog on page 5-45 or Move Media Dialog on page
5-47.
5-44
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Position to Elem Dialog
When Position to Elem is selected, the Position to Elem
Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-51. This option moves the
accessor in front of a specific element.
Enter TARGET
Coord: S< 01 2 A 01
OR Element : 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-51
Position to Elem Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Commands Menu Selection
5-45
Accept
Press the
Step 2
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, two
Response Screens appear. See Figure 5-52 and
Figure 5-53. Otherwise, the changed parameters
continue to display but no action is taken.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-52
Response Screen
The accessor positions itself in front of the specific
element.
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-53
5-46
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Move Media Dialog
When Move Media is selected, the Move Media Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-54. This option moves cartridges
between elements without host intervention.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S< 02 1 A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept : N
Figure 5-54
Move Media Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Commands Menu Selection
5-47
Accept
Press the
Step 2
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Target
Menu appears. See Figure 5-55. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Enter TARGET
Coord: I< 01 1 A 01
OR Element: 01182
Accept : N
Figure 5-55
Target Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
5-48
Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number The fourth field
indicates the column of the
section (A .. E), drive port (A ..
B) or IE station column
600561-A
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 4
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 3 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screens appear. See Figure 5-56 and
Figure 5-57. Otherwise, the changed parameters
continue to display but no action is taken.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-56
Response Screen
The accessor moves the cartridge between the selected
Source and Target elements.
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-57
Response Screen
If a Move Media is attempted without an inventory, the
following screen, refer to Figure 5-58 on page 5-50, is
displayed.
01 Aug 2000
Commands Menu Selection
5-49
-=> WARNING <=The library may not
be inventoried.
Continue : N
Figure 5-58
Warning Dialog
Step 5
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to continue
N to return to the previous
menu
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter, the Warning
message is removed.
5-50
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Inventory Dialog
When Inventory is selected, the Inventory Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-59. This option allows inventory of
specified elements.
Starting Inventory
Coord: S 02 1< A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept : N
Figure 5-59
Inventory Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Commands Menu Selection
5-51
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Number of Elements Dialog, see Figure 5-60 appears.
Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to display
but no action is taken.
Number of Elements
to Inventory: 0100<
Accept: N
Figure 5-60
Number of Elements Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Elements
Indicates the number of
elements to inventory
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screens, Refer to Figure 5-61 on page 5-53 and
Figure 5-62 on page 5-53, appear. Otherwise, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is
taken.
5-52
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-61
Response Screen
The barcode scanner inventories the specified storage
cells.
Requested command is
now complete.
Found : 100
Figure 5-62
01 Aug 2000
Response Screen
Parameters
Values
Found
Indicates the total number of
cartridges detected.
Commands Menu Selection
5-53
Insert/Eject Submenu
Note
Use this option to
insert or eject
cartridge(s)
without host
intervention.
When Insert/Eject is selected, the Insert/Eject Submenu
is displayed. This submenu offers four selections. See
Figure 5-63. The Insert/Eject Submenu defaults to the
Insert selection.
>Insert
Insert Clean Tape...
Eject...
Eject Clean Tape...
Figure 5-63
Insert/Eject Submenu
To choose one of the four selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Insert Screen.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Insert Dialog, Insert Clean Tape Dialog, Eject
Dialog or Eject Clean Tape Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Insert Screen on
page 5-55, Insert Clean Tape Dialog on page 5-56, Eject
Dialog on page 5-61, or Eject Clean Tape Dialog on
page 5-63.
5-54
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Insert Screen
When Insert is selected, the Insert Screen is displayed. See
Figure 5-64. This option moves all cartridges found in the
Insert/Eject station to the first available empty storage cells. If
there are no cartridges in the Insert/Eject station, the response
screen appears. See Figure 5-65.
Insert in progress
Source: 1182
Target: 0000
Figure 5-64
Insert Screen
The accessor moves the cartridge(s) from the Insert/Eject
station to the first available empty storage cell(s).
Current Source and Target elements are updated. After
completion, the Response Screen appears. See
Figure 5-65.
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-65
01 Aug 2000
Response Screen
Commands Menu Selection
5-55
Insert Clean Tape Dialog
When Insert Clean Tape is selected, the Insert Clean
Tape Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-66. This option moves
selected cleaning cartridges from the Insert/Eject station to
the designated empty storage cells.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: I 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 01182
Accept: N
Figure 5-66
Insert Clean Tape Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter default value and move to the next
parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
the Element parameter values.
5-56
Menus and Commands
button to toggle
Parameters
Value
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column. (01 .. 12 for
half inch and DLT
coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
600561-A
Element
Indicates the Insert/Eject
station element number where
the insert operation starts
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Insert
Range Dialog appears. See Figure 5-67. Otherwise, the
changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
Insert Range:
01<
Accept : N
Figure 5-67
Insert Range Dialog
Step 2
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle the
Insert Range parameter values.
Parameters
Value
Insert Range
Indicates the number of
elements for the insert
operation (01 .. 12 for half inch
and DLT elements)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm elements)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Target
Dialog appears. See Figure 5-68. Otherwise, the changed
actions continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Commands Menu Selection
5-57
Enter TARGET
Coord: S 01 2< A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept : N
Figure 5-68
Target Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column. (01 .. 12 for
half inch and DLT
coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
The starting
address is
indicated by the
Coordinate or
Element
parameter. If
several cleaning
tapes are
inserted, the
Coordinate or
Element is
specified for the
first empty cell in
a group of
consecutive
empty cells.
Press the
5-58
Menus and Commands
button to confirm the changes.
600561-A
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Usage
Dialog appears. See Figure 5-69. If N is selected, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is
taken.
Current Usage: 000<
Maximum Usage: 000
Accept: N
Figure 5-69
Usage Dialog
Step 4
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Current Usage
Indicates the number of times
the cleaning cartridge has been
used (000 .. 511)
Maximum Usage
Indicates the maximum
number of allowable uses for
the cleaning cartridge
(000 .. 511)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
accessor moves the number of cleaning cartridges to the
designated range of storage cells. When the operation
completes, the Response Screen appears. See
Figure 5-70. If N is selected, the changed parameters
continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Commands Menu Selection
5-59
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-70
5-60
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Eject Dialog
When Eject is selected, the Eject Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-71. This option allows removal of cartridges without
opening the front door(s) or without host intervention. The
final destination is a slot in the Insert/Eject station.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S< 02 1 A 01
OR Element : 01182
Accept: N
Figure 5-71
Eject Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle the
Coordinate parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Commands Menu Selection
5-61
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Eject
Screen appears. See Figure 5-72. Otherwise, the changed
actions continue to display but no action is taken.
Eject in progress
Source: 00000
Target: 1182
Figure 5-72
Eject Screen
The cartridge is ejected to the first available empty cell in
the Insert/Eject station. The Response Screen appears.
See Figure 5-73.
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-73
5-62
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Eject Clean Tape Dialog
When Eject Clean Tape is selected, the Eject Clean Tape
Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-74. This option allows
removal of the cleaning cartridge(s) without opening the front
door(s) or without host intervention
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S 01 1< A 13
OR Element: 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-74
Eject Clean Tape Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle the
Coordinate parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Commands Menu Selection
5-63
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Clean
Media Eject Screen appears. Refer to Figure 5-75.
Otherwise, the changed actions continue to display but
no action is taken.
Eject in progress
Source : 00000
Target : 00788
Figure 5-75
Eject Clean Tape Screen
The cartridge is ejected to the first available empty cell in
the Insert/Eject station. The Response Screen appears.
See Figure 5-76.
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-76
5-64
Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Database Menu Selection
The Database Menu is primarily used to gain element
database information. Database is selected from the Main
Menu by following this procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
The Main Menu appears with the indicator positioned at
Mode.
Step 2
Press the
button or the
button to position
the selection indicator at Database.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The Database Menu appears. This menu offers four selections.
See Figure 5-77. The Database Menu defaults to the Media
selection.
>Media...
Element...
Config...
Advanced
Figure 5-77
Database Menu
To choose one of the four selections, follow the
steps.
Step 4
Press the
button to select the Media Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Element Dialog, Config Dialog, or the Advanced
Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Media Dialog on
page 5-66, Element Dialog on page 5-67, Config Dialog
on page 5-70, or Advanced Dialog on page 5-71.
01 Aug 2000
Database Menu Selection
5-65
Media Dialog
When Media is selected, the Media Dialog is displayed. This
option obtains information about specific cartridges based on
the barcode label.
In default or mixed media mode, 6 characters are required. In
extended mode, five characters are required. However, up to
sixteen characters may be entered. Figure 5-78 shows the
Media Dialog.
Enter volume label:
AAAAAA
^
Accept : N
Figure 5-78
Media Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
the parameter values in the following list.
Note
If in extended
mode, the space
value (^) erases
the remaining
values and the
wildcard value (*)
is used to indicate
that any volume
label that
includes the
preceding values
will be selected.
5-66
Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
AAAAA
Indicates the volume label
(A .. Z, 0 .. 9, ^, *)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screen, refer to Figure 5-79 on page 5-67,
appears. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
600561-A
BC : 000389
Type
: 3590
Home
: 0060
Current: 0060
Figure 5-79
Response Screen
Parameters
Values
BC
Indicates the value specified in
the Media Dialog
Type
Indicates the cartridge media
type (8590, DLT, 3480, 3490,
3590, 3590 DL, NCTP, 8mm)
Home
Indicates the home location of
the cartridge
Current
Indicates the current location
of the cartridge
Element Dialog
When Element is selected, the Element Dialog is displayed.
See Figure 5-80. This option obtains information about a
specific element from the database.
Enter Desired
Coord: I 01 1 A< 12
OR Element: 01193
Accept: N
Figure 5-80
Element Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the parameter values
and move to the next parameter.
— or —
01 Aug 2000
Database Menu Selection
5-67
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the list.
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column. (01 .. 12 for
half inch and DLT
coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears. Refer to
Figure 5-81 on page 5-69. Otherwise, the changed
actions continue to display but no action is taken.
5-68
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Type
: DLT IE
Coord : I 01 1 A 12
Address : 0027
Index : 1193 [more]
Figure 5-81
Response Dialog
Step 3
Parameters
Values
Type
Indicates the element type
(3480 IE, DLT IE, MIXED IE,
8mm IE, 3480 STOR, DLT
STOR, 8mm STOR, 3480
DRIVE, 3590 DRIVE, NCTP
DRIVE, DLT4 DRIVE, DLT7
DRIVE, 8mm DRIVE)
Coord
Indicates the element
coordinate location
Address
Indicates the current SCSI
element address
Index
Indicates the database element
index
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Configuration
The Configuration Screen appears. See Figure 5-82.
X position: 0047.3
Y position: 0956.4
Z position: 120
Figure 5-82
01 Aug 2000
Configuration Screen
Parameters
Values
X position
Indicates the horizontal
coordinate in millimeters
Y position
Indicates the vertical
coordinate in millimeters
Z position
Indicates the depth coordinate
Database Menu Selection
5-69
Config Dialog
When Config is selected, the Config Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-83. This option allows viewing of the current library
configuration.
Serial#:
Frames :
Cells :
Drives :
Figure 5-83
201100001
1
158
2
[more]
Config Dialog
Note
If the Operator
suspects a library
configuration
problem, use the
Teach New
option. Refer to
Teach New Dialog
on page 5-167.
Step 1
Parameters
Values
Serial
The serial number of the
library
Frames
The number of frames (1 .. 4)
Cells
The number of storage cells
(1 .. 788 for half inch and DLT
cells)
(1 .. 1181 for 8mm cells)
Drives
The number of drives (1 .. 48
for half inch and DLT drives)
(2 ..48 for 8mm drives)
[more]
More information on the
Continuation Screen.
Press the
Screen.
button to select the Continuation
The Continuation Screen appears. Refer to Figure 5-84
on page 5-71.
5-70
Menus and Commands
600561-A
ISSSS
SSSSS
SSSSS
S3D2D
Figure 5-84
Continuation Screen
The screen is a graphics representation of the configuration of
the library.
Parameters
Values
Use the
ISSSS
button to scroll
the cursor to the
right. Press the
Insert/Eject station (I) and 4
columns of Storage Cells (S)
SSSSS
5 columns of Storage Cells
(S)
SSSSS
5 columns of Storage Cells
(S)
S3D2D
1 column of Storage Cells (S)
and the number (1, 2, 3, 4, 6)
of drives (D) in each port of
the bottom drive bay.
Note
button or
the
button
to scroll the
cursor up or
down. Press the
button to
display specific
information
about the
character above
the cursor.
Advanced Dialog
When Advanced is selected, the Advanced Dialog appears.
See Figure 5-85.
>Learn...
Manipulate Get...
Manipulate Put...
Figure 5-85
Advanced Dialog
To choose one of the three selections, follow the steps.
01 Aug 2000
Database Menu Selection
5-71
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Learn Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Manipulate Get Dialog, or Manipulate Put Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. See Learn Dialog or refer to
Manipulate Get on page 5-73 or Manipulate Put on
page 5-74.
Learn Dialog
When Learn is selected, the Learn Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-86. This option is reserved for Customer and Product
Engineering Services and is password protected.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-86
Learn Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Password
Selects the password
(0000 .. 9999)
Accept
Y to accept the changes
N to reject the changes
Press the
Step 2
5-72
Menus and Commands
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all password parameters.
600561-A
Manipulate Get
When Manipulate Get is selected, the Manipulate Get
Dialog appears. See Figure 5-87. This option is reserved for
Customer and Product Engineering Services and is password
protected.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-87
Manipulate Get Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Password
Selects the password
(0000 .. 9999)
Accept
Y to accept the changes
N to reject the changes
Press the
Step 2
01 Aug 2000
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all password parameters.
Database Menu Selection
5-73
Manipulate Put
When Manipulate Put is selected, the Manipulate Put
Dialog appears. See Figure 5-88. This option is reserved for
Customer and Product Engineering Services and is password
protected.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-88
Manipulate Put Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Password
Selects the password
(0000 .. 9999)
Accept
Y to accept the changes
N to reject the changes
Press the
Step 2
5-74
Menus and Commands
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all password parameters.
600561-A
Setup Menu Selection
The Setup Menu is primarily used to change operational
characteristics of the Scalar 1000. Setup is selected from the
Main Menu by following this procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
Step 2
Press the
button or the
button to position
the selection indicator at Setup.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The Setup Menu appears. This menu offers three
selections. See Figure 5-89. The Setup Menu defaults to
the Library selection.
>Library
Drives...
Cleaning
Figure 5-89
Setup Menu
To choose one of the three selections, follow the
steps.
Step 4
Press the
button to select the Library Submenu.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Drives Dialog, or Cleaning Submenu.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Library Submenu on
page 5-76, Drives Dialog on page 5-98, or Cleaning
Submenu on page 5-100.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-75
Library Submenu
When Library is selected, the Library Submenu is
displayed. This submenu offers seven selections. See
Figure 5-90. The Library Submenu defaults to the SCSI
selection.
>SCSI
Host...
Trace...
Security...
Figure 5-90
Media...
Emulate...
RMU
Advanced...
Library Submenu
To choose one of the seven selections, follow the
steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the SCSI Submenu.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Host Dialog, Trace Dialog, Security Dialog, Media
Dialog, Emulate Dialog RMU Submenu, or
Advanced Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to SCSI Submenu on
page 5-77, Host Dialog on page 5-82, Trace Dialog on
page 5-83, Security Dialog on page 5-84, Media Dialog
on page 5-90, Emulate Dialog on page 5-92, RMU
Submenu on page 5-93, or Advanced Dialog on page
5-96.
5-76
Menus and Commands
600561-A
SCSI Submenu
When SCSI is selected, the SCSI Submenu is displayed. This
menu offers three selections. See Figure 5-91. The SCSI
Submenu defaults to the Target ID selection.
>Target ID...
Parity...
Ports...
Figure 5-91
SCSI Submenu
To choose one of the three selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Target ID Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
Parity Dialog or Ports Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Target ID Dialog on
page 5-78, Parity Dialog on page 5-79, or Ports Dialog
on page 5-80.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-77
Target ID Dialog
Note
The Scalar 1000
defaults to SCSI
ID 6.
When Target ID is selected, the Target ID Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-92. This option sets the SCSI ID of the
library. Any change will not take effect until library power is
cycled.
Target ID:
Bus 0:
Bus 1:
Figure 5-92
Next
Now
4<
4
4
4
Accept: N
Target ID Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Bus 0: NEXT
Next indicates the SCSI ID
address that takes effect for
bus port 0 after power is cycled
(0 .. 7)
Bus 1: NEXT
Next indicates the SCSI ID
address that takes effect for
bus port 1 after power is cycled
(0 .. 7)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
The value of the Bus 1 : Now parameter in the
Target ID Dialog is supplied by the library
firmware and can not be changed. The Bus 1 : Now
parameter indicates the SCSI ID address that is
currently in effect (0 .. 7) for bus port 0.
5-78
Menus and Commands
600561-A
The value of the Bus 1 : Now parameter in the
Target ID Dialog is supplied by the library
firmware and can not be changed. The Bus 1 : Now
parameter indicates the SCSI ID address that is
currently in effect (0 .. 7) for bus port 1.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Parity Dialog
When Parity is selected, the Parity Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-93. This option sets the SCSI bus parity behavior. Any
change will not take effect until library power is cycled.
Parity
Retries
Figure 5-93
Next
Now
Yes< Yes
001
001
Accept: N
Parity Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Parity : Next
YES to enable SCSI parity
NO to disable SCSI parity
Retries : Next
Set the number of retries
(000 .. 255) allowed when a
SCSI parity error is detected
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
The value of the Parity : Now parameter in the
Parity Dialog is supplied by the library firmware
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-79
and can not be changed. The Parity : Now
parameter indicates if the SCSI parity is enabled
(Yes, No). If parity is disabled, the retries parameter
is ignored.
The value of the Retries : Now parameter in the
Parity Dialog is supplied by the library firmware
and can not be changed. The Retries : Now
parameter indicates the current number of retries
(000 .. 255) allowed when a SCSI parity error is
detected.
Step 2
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Ports Dialog
When Ports is selected, the Ports Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-94. This option indicates the current SCSI bus type
and usage.
Bus 0:
Bus 1:
Figure 5-94
5-80
Menus and Commands
INSTALLED
YES
NO
TYPE
HVD
-
Ports Screen
Parameters
Values
Bus 0 : Installed
YES indicates the port is active
NO indicates the port is not
active.
Bus 0 : Type
HVD indicates the bus is high
voltage differential
LVD indicates the bus is low
voltage differential
SE indicates the bus is single
ended.
Bus 1 : Installed
YES indicates the port is active
NO indicates the bus is not
active.
600561-A
Bus 1 : Type
01 Aug 2000
HVD indicates the bus is high
voltage differential
LVD indicates the bus is low
voltage differential
SE indicates the bus is single
ended.
Setup Menu Selection
5-81
Host Dialog
When Host is selected, the Host Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-95. This option sets the type of host control.
Host type:
SCSI<
Accept: N
Figure 5-95
Host Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
At present, only
SCSI control is
supported.
Parameters
Values
Host type
SCSI indicates SCSI control
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 of all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
5-82
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Trace Dialog
When Trace is selected, the Trace Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-96. This option defines and enables the serial service
port.
Trace output
USE: NONE<
Accept: N
Figure 5-96
Trace Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter default values in the
following list.
Note
Parameters
Values
USE
SERIAL indicates information
is returned via the serial port
NONE is the default to allow
the port to be used for RMU
communication
VCONSOL is used for
development only
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If the RMU is not
installed, this
option must be
set to SERIAL in
order to prevent a
SAC from being
posted.
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-83
Security Dialog
When Security is selected, the Security Dialog is displayed.
See Figure 5-97. This option changes the Operator Panel LCD
Security mode and/or the password that protects it. The
Operator Panel can also be secured by the host. Whichever
method is used to secure the Operator Panel must be the
method used to release the security. If a password has not
been set, the password dialog screen is shown.
Security Enabled : N<
Change password : N
Accept : N
Figure 5-97
Security Dialog
Switching Security From Off to On
To switch the security from off to on, follow the steps below:
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Security
Y to enable LCD security
N to disable LCD security
Password
If the password is to be
changed, refer to Changing the
Password on page 5-87. If the
password is not to be changed,
select N
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
5-84
Menus and Commands
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
600561-A
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter and the security
parameter is enabled, the Password Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-98.
If N is selected for the Accept parameter the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Enter password :
[0000]
^
Accept : N
Figure 5-98
Password Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Password
Indicates the password
(0000 .. 9999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
response screens appears. See Figure 5-99.
Security is now ON.
Figure 5-99
Security is ON Screen
Step 4
01 Aug 2000
Press the
Submenu.
button to return to the Setup
Setup Menu Selection
5-85
Switching Security From On to Off
To switch the security from on to off, follow the steps below:
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Security
Y to enable LCD security
N to disable LCD security
Password
If the password is to be
changed, refer to Changing the
Password on page 5-87. If the
password is not to be changed,
select N
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter and the security
parameter is disabled, the Password Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-100.
If N is selected for the Accept parameter, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Enter password :
[0000]
^
Accept : N
Figure 5-100
Password Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
5-86
Menus and Commands
600561-A
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Password
Indicates the password
(0000 .. 9999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value and the
password is verified, the response screens appear. See
Figure 5-101.
Security is now OFF.
Figure 5-101
Security is OFF Screen
Step 4
Press the
Submenu.
button to return to the Setup
Changing the Password
To change the password follow the steps below:
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Security
If the Security is to be changed
refer to Switching Security From
Off to On on page 5-84 or
Switching Security From On to
Off on page 5-86.
Setup Menu Selection
5-87
Password
Y to change LCD password
N to leave the LCD password
as it is
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter and the password
parameter, the Change Password Dialog appears.
Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to display
but no action is taken.
Change Password
Old[0000] New[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-102
Change Password Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Old
Indicates the password to be
changed (0000 .. 9999)
New
Indicates what the password
will be changed to (0000 ..
9999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
password is changed and the Changed Password Screen
appears. Refer to Figure 5-102 on page 5-88. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
5-88
Menus and Commands
600561-A
The password has
been changed.
Figure 5-103
Password Changed
Step 4
01 Aug 2000
Press the
Submenu.
button to return to the Setup
Setup Menu Selection
5-89
Media Dialog
When Media is selected, the Media Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-104. This option controls the setting for media
handling and reporting. The host software must support
mixed media types if the library is operating in mixed media
mode. For additional information, refer to document number
600840 Scalar 1000 SCSI Reference Manual.
Media:
MIXED<
Extend Status
: Y
ASCQ : Y
VolTag : Y
Accept : N
Figure 5-104
Media Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
If the value of the
Media parameter
is changed, an
inventory is
required.
5-90
Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
Media
DEFAULT indicates that the
library supports 6 character
bar code labels, or mixed
media labels that have an
additional 7th media ID
character. The bar code is
stored and reported as a 6
character bar code (ignoring
any mixed media IDs).
EXTENDED indicates that the
library supports 5 to 16
character bar code labels,
which may indicate any mixed
media IDs and/or checksums.
MIXED indicates that the
library supports only 6
character bar code labels with
an additional 7th media
character media type identifier
600561-A
Note
Extend status,
ASCQ, and
VolTag are valid
only when mixed
media types are
enabled and the
cartridges are
properly labeled
with barcode
labels having a
media identifier.
Extend Status
Y indicates that extended
element descriptor status is
enabled
N indicates that extended
element descriptor status is
disabled
ASCQ
Y indicates that extended
Additional Sense Code
Qualifiers is enabled
N indicates that extended
Additional Sense Code
Qualifiers are disabled
VolTag
Y indicates that the reported
BC will include the media ID
N indicates that the reported
BC will not include the media
ID
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-91
Emulate Dialog
When Emulate is selected, the Emulate Dialog is displayed.
See Figure 5-105. This option changes the operating mode of
the library. Different emulation modes cause the library to
respond to SCSI INQUIRY commands in a manner consistent
with the listed library emulation type. Any change will not
take effect until the library power is cycled.
Select library type :
NATIVE <
Accept : N
Figure 5-105
Emulate Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
Refer to the
document
number 600974
Scalar 1000 SCSI
Reference Manual
for all command
processing.
Parameters
Values
Library type
NATIVE
STK 9710
EXB 480
EMASS
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
5-92
Menus and Commands
600561-A
RMU Submenu
The Scalar 1000 is equipped with a Remote Management Unit
(RMU) which allows web-based library management via the
Ethernet port. The RMU Submenu allows the administrator to
set the initial values of the RMU network parameters to allow
for remote access.
When RMU is selected, the RMU Submenu is displayed. See
Figure 5-106.
>Name/DHCP...
IP...
Figure 5-106
RMU Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the
steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Name/DHCP
— or —
Press the
IP Dialog.
button or the
Press the
button.
button to select the
The selected menu appears. Refer to Name/DHCP Dialog
on page 5-93 or IP Dialog on page 5-95.
Name/DHCP Dialog
When Name/DHCP is selected, the Name/DHCP Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-107 on page 5-94. Name/DHCP
allows the user to enable/disable Dynamic Host
Communication Protocol (DHCP) and to define the host name
for the RMU.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-93
DHCP : N<
Name : webfoot3
Accept : N
Figure 5-107
Name/DHCP Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
DHCP
Y to enable DHCP
communication
N to disable the DHCP
communication
Name
Indicates the host name
assigned to the RMU for
communicating with the
library via the RMU (letters
A .. Z and numbers 0 .. 9).
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
5-94
Menus and Commands
600561-A
IP Dialog
When IP is selected, the IP Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-108. The IP Dialog allows the user to set the IP,
Subnet and Gateway network addresses for library
communication via the RMU.
IP : 100<100.100.100
Sub: 225.225.225.225
Gat: 100.100.100.100
Accept: N
Figure 5-108
IP Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
IP
Indicates the IP address (four
sets of numbers 0 .. 999)
Sub
Indicates the Subnet address
(four sets of numbers 0 .. 999)
Gat
Indicates the Gateway (four
sets of numbers 0 .. 999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-95
Advanced Dialog
When Advanced is selected, the Advanced Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-109. This option enables or disables
the automatic configuration, calibration, and cartridge scan
when the library has power cycled.
If Auto Inventory is disabled, the element status is not
known until the host issues an Initialize Status command or
an Inventory is performed via the Operator Panel.
If Auto Inventory is enabled, an automatic cartridge
inventory is executed on each power cycle.
Any changes in the Operating Mode parameter value
should be made by authorized Service Personnel. The
default is set to 0.
Auto Teach
:
Y<
Auto Inventory:
N
Operating Mode:
0
Accept: N
Figure 5-109
Advanced Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
5-96
Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
Auto Teach
Y to enable Auto Teach for
automatic configuration and
calibration on each power
cycle
N to disable Auto Teach on
each power cycle
Auto Inventory
Y to enable Auto Inventory for
automatic cartridge scanning
inventory on each power cycle
N to disable Auto Inventory
on each power cycle
600561-A
Operating Mode
0 to select Normal mode of
operation
1 to select a 3 second delay
before a Get operation is
performed on a DLT drive
after detecting that a tape was
ejected
2 to allow the Scalar 1000 to
issue an UNLOAD command
to the Model 4001S, Model
7001S, Model 8001S, AIT3102,
AIT5002, AIT5102, and NCTP
drives if the cartridge is not
ejected by the host
3 to activate options 1 and 2
4 to disable automatic
cartridge recovery on PUT
failures
5 to activate options 1 and 4
6 to activate options 2 and 4
7 to activate options 3 and 4
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-97
Drives Dialog
When Drives is selected, the Drives Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-110. This options allows modification of the drive
SCSI ID for the Model 4001S, Model 7001S, Model 8001S,
AIT3102, AIT5002, AIT5102, and NCTP drives.
Drive ID Override:
Enabled <
Set Drive ID:
N
Accept:
Figure 5-110
N
Drives Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Override
Enabled allows the operator to
enable the setting of SCSI ID
for supported drives
Disabled prevents the library
from setting the SCSI ID for
supported drives
Set Drive ID
Y to view and set the drive
SCSI ID
N to not change the drive SCSI
ID
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Enabled is selected or was previously selected for the
Drive ID Override parameter and Y is selected for the Set
Drive Id and the Accept parameters, the SCSI ID Dialog
appears. Refer to Figure 5-111 on page 5-99.
5-98
Menus and Commands
600561-A
If Drive ID Override is disabled and Y is selected for
Accept, the changed parameters continue to display but
no new screen action is displayed.
— or —
If N is selected for the Accept parameter, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
Drive
1200<
Figure 5-111
SCSI
ID
Next
Now
01
01
Accept: N
SCSI ID Dialog
Step 2
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Drive
Indicates the element index of
the drive
(01200 .. 01247 for DLT and
8mm)
(01200 .. 01215 for all half-inch)
Next
Next indicates the SCSI ID
address that takes effect after
power is cycled (0 .. 15)
Now
The SCSI ID address that is
currently in effect (0 .. 15)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-99
Cleaning Submenu
When Cleaning is selected, the Cleaning Submenu is
displayed. This submenu offers two selections. See
Figure 5-90. The Cleaning Submenu defaults to the Drives
selection.
>Drives...
Media...
View...
Figure 5-112
Cleaning Submenu
To choose one of the three selections, follow the
steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Drives Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Media Dialog or View Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Drives Dialog on
page 5-101, Media Dialog on page 5-103 or View Dialog
on page 5-105.
5-100 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Drives Dialog
When Drives is selected, the Drives Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-113. This option allows selection of automatic
cleaning for Model 4001S, Model 7001S, Model 8001S,
AIT3102, AIT5002, AIT5102, and NCTP drives.
AutoClean:
Schedule:
Hours: 00
Figure 5-113
Y<
Delayed
Min :00
Accept:: N
Drives Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
Parameters
Values
AutoClean
Y to enable automatic drive
cleaning
N to reject automatic drive
cleaning
Schedule
Immediate to allow drive
cleaning when requested by
the drive
Delayed to schedule drive
cleaning for requesting drives
at the specified time
Hours
Hour (00 .. 23) that cleaning
should start
Min
Minute (0 .. 59) that cleaning
should start
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
If Immediate
cleaning is
selected, no time
values can be
entered.
Press the
Step 2
01 Aug 2000
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
Setup Menu Selection
5-101
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen updates to
reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
5-102 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Media Dialog
When Media is selected, the Media Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-114. This option allows an operator to specify DLT or
AIT 8mm cleaning tapes by BC in the library.
A BC mask is a valid, partial barcode label that can be
followed by a wildcard character (*). Barcode labels that
match the mask are moved as cleaning tapes. The BC mask
must not match more than a maximum of 127 cleaning tapes.
Media Type:
BC : AAAAAA
^
DLT
Continue: N
Figure 5-114
Media Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Step 2
Parameters
Values
Media Type
Selects the medium type
(DLT, 8mm, NCTP)
BC
Indicates the BC mask of the
cleaning cartridge(s)
Continue
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the Usage Dialog
appears. Refer to Figure 5-115 on page 5-104. Otherwise, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Setup Menu Selection
5-103
Current Use:
Maximum Use:
000<
000
Accept: N
Figure 5-115
Usage Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Note
If the BC mask
selects more than
1 cleaning tape,
the current and
maximum usage
parameter values
are applied to
each cleaning
tape.
Parameters
Values
Current Usage
Specifies the number of times
the cleaning cartridge has been
used (000 .. 511)
Maximum Usage
Specifies the number of times
the cleaning cartridge can be
used (000 .. 511)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen updates to
reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
5-104 Menus and Commands
600561-A
View Dialog
When View is selected, the View Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-116. This option allows an operator to see a specific
cleaning tape usage.
BC: CLN001
Status: Reset
Max: 000 Count: 000
Index: 001<RESET: N
Figure 5-116
View Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
cleaning indices from 1 to 128.
01 Aug 2000
button to view
Parameters
Values
BC
Indicates the cleaning tape bar
code label
Status
Expired: Cleaning tape has
expired
Missing: Configured cleaning
tape is not present within the
library
Reset: Cleaning tape not
configured
Valid: Cleaning tape is
configured and is usable
Max
Indicates the maximum
allowed usage count
(000 .. 511)
Count
Indicates the current usage
count
Index
Indicates the current cleaning
tape database index
RESET
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Setup Menu Selection
5-105
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Reset parameter value, the changed parameter
values are accepted. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
5-106 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Utils Menu Selection
The Utils Menu is primarily used to execute various Scalar
1000 utilities. Utils is selected from the Main Menu by
following this procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
The main Menu appears with the indicator positioned at
Mode.
Step 2
Press the
button or the
the selection indicator at Utils.
Step 3
Press the
button to position
button.
The Utils Menu appears. This menu offers two
selections. See Figure 5-117. The Utils Menu defaults to
the Library selection.
>Library
Drives
Figure 5-117
Utils Menu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the
steps.
Step 4
Press the
button to select the Library Submenu.
— or —
Press the
button or the
Drives Submenu.
Press the
button to select
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Library Submenu on
page 5-108 or Drives Submenu on page 5-117.
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-107
Library Submenu
When Library is selected, the Library Submenu is
displayed. This submenu offers five selections. See
Figure 5-118. The Library Submenu defaults to the Screen
selection.
>Screen...
Audio...
Dump
Time...
Figure 5-118
Date...
Library Menu
To choose one of the five selections, follow the
steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Screen Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select
Audio Dialog, Dump, Time Dialog, or Date Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected dialog or screen appears. Refer to Screen
Dialog on page 5-109, Audio Dialog on page 5-113,
Dump on page 5-114, Time Dialog on page 5-115, or
Date Dialog on page 5-116.
5-108 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Screen Dialog
When Screen is selected, the Screen Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-119. This option controls the settings related to the
physical Operator Panel LCD screen.
Backlight Enable:
Use Screen Saver:
Y<
N
Accept: N
Figure 5-119
Screen Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Backlight enable
Y to enable LCD backlighting
N to disable LCD backlighting
Use Screen Saver
Y to enable the screen saver
N to disable the screen saver
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for Use Screen Saver and Accept
parameters, the Timeout Value Dialog appears. Refer to
Figure 5-120 on page 5-110. Otherwise, the screen
returns to the Library Menu. Refer to Figure 5-118 on
page 5-108.
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-109
Timeout Value
Password Enable
: 30<
: N
Accept: N
Figure 5-120
Timeout Value Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Timeout Value
10 - 60 minutes (default = 30)
Password enable
Y to enable a screen saver
password
N to disable a screen saver
password
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 4
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 3 for all of the parameters.
If Password enable changes from N to Y or Y to N and
Accept changes to Y, the Password Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-121. Otherwise, the screen returns to the
Library Menu. Refer to Figure 5-118 on page 5-108.
Note
Password enable
can change from
Y to N only if a
password was
previously set.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-121
5-110 Menus and Commands
Password Dialog
600561-A
Step 5
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Password
Selects the password
(0000 .. 9999)
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
Step 6
Repeat Step 5 for all password parameters.
Step 7
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value while the
Password enable is set to Y, the password is changed. See
Figure 5-122.
The password has
been changed.
Figure 5-122
Password Change Dialog
Otherwise, if Y is selected for the Accept parameter value
while the Password enable is set to N, the password
protection is removed. If the password is entered
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-111
incorrectly, the following Invalid Dialog appears. See
Figure 5-123.
You did not enter a
valid password
Figure 5-123
Invalid Password Dialog
Step 8
5-112 Menus and Commands
Press the
Dialog.
button to return to the Password
600561-A
Audio Dialog
When Audio is selected, the Audio Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-124. This option controls the settings to enable or
disable the audio alarm.
Audio Enabled
: Y<
Accept : N
Figure 5-124
Audio Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Audio Enable
Y to enable audio
N to disable audio
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen updates to
reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-113
Dump
When Dump is selected, the Response Screen is displayed after
the dump execution is complete. See Figure 5-125. This option
captures the current operating state of the library which
consists of database, log, parameter, and trace information.
The dump file may be retrieved by a SCSI READ BUFFER
command.
The code dump is now
completed.
Figure 5-125
5-114 Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Time Dialog
When Time is selected, the Time Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-126. This option sets the 24 hour time format of the
library.
The library does not automatically adjust for Daylight
Savings Time.
Hour
Min
Sec
: 18<
: 24
: 25
Accept: N
Figure 5-126
Time Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Hour
Indicates the hour of the day
(00 .. 23)
Min
Indicates the minute of the
hour (00 .. 59)
Sec
Indicates the second of the
minute (00 .. 59)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-115
Date Dialog
When Date is selected, the Date Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-127. This option sets the date displayed by the
library.
Year : 00<
Month : 08
Day
: 16
Accept: N
Figure 5-127
Date Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Year
Indicates the last two digits of
the year (00 .. 99)
Month
Indicates the two digits of the
month (01 .. 12)
Day
Indicates the two digits of the
day (01 .. 31)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the screen
updates to reflect the changes. Otherwise, the changed
parameters continue to display but no action is taken.
5-116 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Drives Submenu
When Drives is selected, the Drives Submenu is displayed.
This submenu offers four selections. See Figure 5-128. The
Drives Submenu defaults to the Update Microcode
selection.
The menu selection supports only Model 4001S, Model
7001S, Model 8001S, AIT3102, AIT5002, AIT5102, and NCTP
drives.
>Update Microcode...
Clean Drives...
Unload Drives...
Initialize
Figure 5-128
Drives Submenu
To choose one of the four selections, follow the
steps.
Step 3
Press the
button to select the Update
Microcode Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select
Clean Drives Dialog, Unload Drives Dialog, or
Initialize Submenu.
Press the
button.
The selected dialog or screen appears. Refer to Update
Microcode Dialog on page 5-118, Clean Drives Dialog
on page 5-123, Unload Drives Dialog on page 5-125, or
Initialize Submenu on page 5-127.
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-117
Update Microcode Dialog
When Update Microcode is selected, the Update
Microcode Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-129. This option
initiates a drive firmware update.
The operator must determine the location coordinate or
element address of the firmware update tape prior to
following this procedure.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: I 01 1< A 12
OR Element: 01193
Accept : N
Figure 5-129
Update Microcode Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter default value and move to the next
parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
the Coordinate parameter values.
5-118 Menus and Commands
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion
modules are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
600561-A
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Element Dialog appears. See Figure 5-130. Otherwise,
the changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
Enter TARGET
Coord: D 01 1< A 01
OR Element:01200
Accept : N
Figure 5-130
Element Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
Utils Menu Selection
5-119
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the
row of the column. (01 .. 12 for
all half inch and DLT
coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 4
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 3 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the Drive
Range Dialog appears. See Figure 5-131. Otherwise, the
changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
Drive Range: 01<
Accept: N
Figure 5-131
Drive Range Dialog
Step 5
Press the
button to select the current
parameter default value and move to the next
parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
the parameter values.
5-120 Menus and Commands
button to toggle
600561-A
Parameters
Values
Drive Range
Indicates the number of drives
to receive the firmware
update.
Drives are in order of their
element address
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 6
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 5 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the two
Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-132. Otherwise,
the changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
-UPDATE MICROCODECycle 1 of 3
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-132
Response Screen
Step 7
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
Cancel parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Status
Running indicates that the
current command is in
progress.
Completed indicates the
firmware on all the drives in
the cycle has been updated.
Canceled indicates the cycle
has been canceled
ERROR! indicates an error has
occurred
Utils Menu Selection
5-121
Cancel
Press the
Y to cancel the cycle
N to continue the cycle
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter, the cycle is
canceled and the Cancel parameter does not appear.
5-122 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Clean Drives Dialog
When Clean Drives is selected, the Clean Drives Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-133. This option initiates a drive
cleaning operation.
Enter TARGET
Coord: D< 01 1 A 01
OR Element: 01200
Accept: N
Figure 5-133
Clean Drives Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle the
Coordinate parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Utils Menu Selection
5-123
Accept
Press the
Step 2
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Progress Screen appears, see Figure 5-134, followed by
the Response Screen, see Figure 5-135. Otherwise, the
changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-134
Progress Screen
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-135
5-124 Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Unload Drives Dialog
When Unload Drives is selected, the Unload Drives Dialog
is displayed. See Figure 5-136. This option initiates a tape eject
operation from the specified drive.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: D 01< 1 A 01
OR Element: 01200
Accept: N
Figure 5-136
Unload Drives Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Utils Menu Selection
5-125
Accept
Press the
Step 2
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Progress Screen appears, see Figure 5-137, followed by
the Response Screen, see Figure 5-138. Otherwise, the
changed actions continue to display but no action is
taken.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-137
Progress Screen
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-138
5-126 Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
Initialize Submenu
When Initialize is selected, the Initialize Submenu is
displayed. This submenu offers two selections. See
Figure 5-139. The Initialize Submenu defaults to the
Communication selection.
>Communication
SCSI
Figure 5-139
Initialize Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the
steps.
Step 3
Press the
button to select Communication.
— or —
Press the
SCSI.
button or the
Press the
button.
button to select
The selected screen appears. Refer to Communication on
page 5-128 or SCSI on page 5-129.
01 Aug 2000
Utils Menu Selection
5-127
Communication
When Communication is selected, the Progress Screen, see
Figure 5-140, followed by the Response Screen, see
Figure 5-141, appear. This option initiates communication
tests to drives and initializes the drive state of Model 4001S,
Model 7001S, Model 8001S, AIT3102, AIT5002, AIT5102, and
NCTP appropriately.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-140
Progress Screen
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-141
5-128 Menus and Commands
Response Screen
600561-A
SCSI
When SCSI is selected, all SCSI IDs are initialized to the SCSI
IDs previously set by the operator. The Progress Screen, see
Figure 5-141, followed by the Response Screen, see
Figure 5-142, appear.
Requested command is
now in progress ...
Figure 5-142
Progress Screen
Requested command is
now complete.
Figure 5-143
01 Aug 2000
Response Screen
Utils Menu Selection
5-129
Service Menu Selection
The Service Menu is primarily used to execute various
Scalar 1000 diagnostics and exercisers. These options are
primarily intended for trained service representatives.
Service is selected from the Main Menu by following this
procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
Step 2
Press the
button or the
button to position
the selection indicator at Service.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The Service Menu appears. This menu offers six
selections. See Figure 5-144. The Service Menu defaults
to the Start selection.
>Start...
Diags
Teach
SAC...
Figure 5-144
Demo...
Advanced
Service Menu
To choose one of the six selections, follow the steps.
Step 4
Press the
button to select the Start Dialog
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Diags Submenu, Teach Submenu, SAC Dialog,
Demo Dialog, or Advanced Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Start Dialog on
page 5-131, Diags Submenu on page 5-133, Teach
Submenu on page 5-167, SAC Dialog on page 5-172,
Demo Dialog on page 5-172, or Advanced Dialog on
page 5-175.
5-130 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Start Dialog
When Start is selected, the Preventative Maintenance (PM)
Due Dialog, see Figure 5-145, is displayed. If a reset of the PM
values is selected, the Confirm Change Dialog, see
Figure 5-146, is displayed. The menu flow continues with
either Start Dialog with No Errors or Start Dialog with Errors.
PM Due:
01/01/98
X Remain:
00500000
Y Remain:
000500000
Reset PM values? N<
Figure 5-145
Preventive Maintenance Due Dialog
Step 1
Press the
value.
button to select the current parameter
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Reset PM values
Y to reset PM values
N to keep PM values
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Reset PM values parameter value,
the Confirm Change Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-146. Otherwise, the flow continues with either
the Start Dialog with No Errors, refer to Figure 5-147 on
page 5-132, or the Start Dialog with Errors, refer to
Figure 5-148 on page 5-133, display.
Confirm change?
Figure 5-146
01 Aug 2000
N<
Confirm Change Dialog
Service Menu Selection
5-131
Step 2
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Confirm change
Y to accept changes to PM
values.
N to reject changes to PM
values.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Confirm Change parameter value
and no errors were present, the Start Dialog with No
Error, see Figure 5-147, is displayed.
If Y is selected for the Confirm Change parameter value
and recent errors were present, the Start Dialog with
Errors, refer to Figure 5-148 on page 5-133, is displayed.
This option provides information for a service call. The
Service Action Code (SAC) is based on the displayed
error code. Refer to Service Action Codes on page 7-3 for
additional information. Refer to document number
600838-D Scalar 1000 Maintenance Manual for a
course of action related to the displayed SAC.
If N is selected for the Confirm Change parameter value,
the Preventative Maintenance Due is displayed.
There are no more
SACs to report
Figure 5-147
5-132 Menus and Commands
Start Dialog with No Errors
600561-A
Found SAC at:
03/05/97
14:04:38.68
SAC : E1
Error: 0x02030204
Figure 5-148
Start Dialog with Error
Note
Press the
button or the
button to
scroll between
SAC values.
Diags Submenu
Note
Diagnostics are
grouped
according to
functional areas.
When Diags is selected, the Diags Submenu is displayed.
This menu offers six selections. See Figure 5-149. The Diags
Submenu defaults to the DI/DO selection.
>DI/DO
Gripper
Scanner
Accessor
Figure 5-149
SelfTest...
PowerSup...
Diags Submenu
To choose one of the six selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the DI/DO Submenu.
— or —
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-133
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Gripper Submenu, Scanner Submenu, Accessor
Submenu, SelfTest Dialog, or PowerSup Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to DI/DO Submenu
on page 5-135, Gripper Submenu on page 5-143,
Scanner Submenu on page 5-154, Accessor Submenu
on page 5-159, SelfTest Dialog on page 5-164, or
PowerSup Dialog on page 5-165.
5-134 Menus and Commands
600561-A
DI/DO Submenu
Note
When DI/DO is selected, the DI/DO Submenu is displayed.
This menu offers three selections. See Figure 5-150. The
DI/DO Submenu defaults to the Loopback selection.
Use these tests to
isolate problems
in the system.
>Loopback...
Sensors
Locks...
Figure 5-150
DI/DO Submenu
To choose one of the three selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Loopback Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Sensors Dialog or Locks Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Loopback Dialog on
page 5-136, Sensors Submenu on page 5-138, or Locks
Dialog on page 5-142.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-135
Loopback Dialog
When Loopback is selected, the Loopback Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-151. This option sends test signals
from the main control card to other system cards and back.
Device: LMC
Number: 01
Results:
Accept: N
Figure 5-151
Loopback Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Device
Indicates the loopback tests to
run (LMC, LGR, LPN)
Number
Indicates which device
number should be tested. This
field is always set to 01
because there is only one of
each device to be tested in the
Scalar 1000
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screen appears. Refer to Figure 5-152 on page
5-137. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
5-136 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Device: LMC
Number: 01
Results: PASSED
Accept: N
Figure 5-152
01 Aug 2000
Response Dialog
Parameters
Values
Results
Passed indicates that the test
executed successfully
Failed indicates that the test
did not execute successfully
Accept
Y to accept change
N to reject changes
Service Menu Selection
5-137
Sensors Submenu
When Sensors is selected, the Sensors Submenu is
displayed. This menu offers two selections. See Figure 5-154.
The Sensors Submenu defaults to the Wrap selection.
>Wrap ...
Real Time ...
Figure 5-153
Sensors Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Wrap Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
Real Time Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Wrap Dialog on
page 5-139 or Real Time on page 5-141.
5-138 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Wrap Dialog
When Wrap is selected, the Wrap Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-154. This option tests the ability of the system sensors
to report state changes.
Device:
ALL SENSORS
Results :
<
Accept: N
Figure 5-154
Wrap Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Device
Indicates the list of sensors to
test (All, Gripper_Tach,
IE_Lock, Y_Home, X_Home,
Touch_Tip, Gripper_Open,
Retract_Complete, IE_Open)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screen appears. Refer to Figure 5-155 on page
5-140. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-139
Device:
ALL
<
Results : Passed
Accept: N
Figure 5-155
5-140 Menus and Commands
Response Dialog
Parameters
Values
Results
Passed indicates that the test
executed successfully
Failed indicates that the test
did not execute successfully
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
600561-A
Real Time
When Real Time is selected, the Real Time screen is
displayed. See Figure 5-156. This option indicates the state
changes of the sensors and allows real time viewing of the
state changes.
GripTach=0
TouchTip=0
GripOpen=0
RetrComp=0
Figure 5-156
01 Aug 2000
YHome=0
XHome=0
IELock=0
IEOpen=0
Real Time Screen
Parameters
Values
GripTach
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
TouchTip
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
GripOpen
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
RetrComp
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
YHome
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
XHome
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
IELock
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
IEOpen
0 indicates an ON state
1 indicates an OFF state
Service Menu Selection
5-141
Locks Dialog
When Locks is selected, the Locks Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-157. This option exercises the I/E station lock
without having to open and close the station.
If media removal has been prevented by the host, the
I/E station can not be unlocked.
Pressing Enter will
toggle the lock.
State : Unlocked
Figure 5-157
Locks Dialog
Step 1
5-142 Menus and Commands
Press the
button to select the State parameter.
Parameters
Values
State
Locked indicates that the
Insert/Eject station is locked
Unlocked indicates that the
Insert/Eject station is
unlocked
600561-A
Gripper Submenu
When Gripper is selected, the Gripper Submenu is
displayed. This menu offers two selections. See Figure 5-158.
The Gripper Menu defaults to the Get/Put Storage
selection.
>Get/Put Storage...
Get/Put Drives...
Step...
Figure 5-158
Gripper Submenu
To choose one of the three selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Get/Put Storage
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Get/Put Drives Dialog or Step Dialog
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Get/Put Storage
Dialog on page 5-144, Get/Put Drives Dialog on page
5-148, or Step Dialog on page 5-152.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-143
Get/Put Storage Dialog
When Get/Put Storage is selected, the Get/Put Storage
Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-159. This option does an in
place GET and PUT of all cartridges in the specified range. No
element to element movements are allowed.
The gripper test will
get/put media
Cycles to run:
009<
[more]
Figure 5-159
Get/Put Storage Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Cycles to run
Indicates the number of cycles
to run (1 .. 999)
[more]
More selections on the
Continuation Menu
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
When [more] is selected, the Continuation Dialog
appears. See Figure 5-160.
Enter SOURCE
Coord: S 01< 2 A 01
OR Element: 00000
Accept: N
Figure 5-160
5-144 Menus and Commands
Continuation Dialog
600561-A
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle the
Coordinate parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 4
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 3 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Number of Elements Dialog appears.
Refer to Figure 5-161 on page 5-146. Otherwise, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is
taken.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-145
Number of Elements
to Get/Put :
0100
Accept : N
Figure 5-161
Number of Elements Dialog
Step 5
Press the
button to select the current
parameter default value and move to the next
parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Get/Put
Selects the number of elements
where get/put operations are
applied (0000 .. 1181)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 6
button to toggle
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 5 for each parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears. Refer to Figure 5-162 on page
5-146. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
DIAGS GRIPPER TEST
Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-162
5-146 Menus and Commands
Response Dialog
600561-A
Step 7
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Press the
button or the
Cancel parameter values.
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Cycle
The number of completed test
cycles of the requested cycles
Status
Shows the status of the
indicated cycle (Running,
Completed, Error, Canceled)
Cancel
Y to cancel the test.
N to continue running the test.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter value, the test is
cancelled. Otherwise, the test continues.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-147
Get/Put Drives Dialog
When Get/Put Drives is selected, the Get/Put Drives
Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-163. This option does an in
place GET and PUT of all cartridges in the specified range to
the specified drive(s).
The menu selection supports only Model 4001S, Model
7001S, Model 8001S, AIT3102, AIT5002, AIT5102, and NCTP
drives.
The gripper test will
get/put media
Cycles to run:
009<
[more]
Figure 5-163
Get/Put Drives Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Cycles to run
Indicates the number of cycles
to run (1 .. 999)
[more]
More selections on the
Continuation Menu
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
When [more] is selected, the Continuation Menu
appears. Refer to Figure 5-164 on page 5-149.
5-148 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Enter SOURCE
Coordinate : D 01 1< A 01
OR Element : 01200
Accept : N
Figure 5-164
Continuation Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current parameter
default value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle the
Coordinate parameter values.
01 Aug 2000
Parameters
Values
Coord
The first field indicates the
type of cell (I for I/E Station, D
for Drive, S for Storage cell)
The second field indicates the
module number which can be
modified if expansion modules
are present (1 .. 4)
The third field indicates the
storage cell section (1 .. 4),
drive bay (1 .. 2), or IE station
number
The fourth field indicates the
column of the section (A .. E),
drive port (A .. B) or IE station
column
The fifth field indicates the row
of the column. (01 .. 12 for half
inch and DLT coordinates)
(01 .. 18 for 8mm coordinates)
Element
Indicates the element number
which corresponds with the
coordinate parameter
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Service Menu Selection
5-149
Press the
Step 4
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 3 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Number of Elements Dialog appears. See Figure 5-165.
Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to display
but no action is taken.
Number of Drives
to Get/Put :
0010<
Accept : N
Figure 5-165
Number of Elements Dialog
Step 5
Press the
button to select the current
parameter default value and move to the next
parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Get/Put
Selects the number of
elements where the Get/Put
operation is applied
(0000 .. 0048 for all elements)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 6
button to toggle
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 5 for all of the parameter in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears. Refer to Figure 5-166 on page
5-151. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
5-150 Menus and Commands
600561-A
DIAGS GRIPPER TEST
Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-166
Response Dialog
Step 7
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Press the
button or the
Cancel parameter values.
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Cycle
The number of completed test
cycles of the requested cycles
Status
Shows the status of the
indicated cycle (Running,
Completed, Error, Canceled)
Cancel
Y to cancel the test.
N to continue running the test.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter value, the test is
cancelled. Otherwise, the test continues.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-151
Step Dialog
When Step is selected, the Step Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-167. This option provides low level control of
Gripper functions. The function should be used by trained
service personnel.
This test should be
used by trained
personnel ONLY!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-167
Step Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to continue the test.
N to cancel the test
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the
Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-168.
Arrow changes
Grip:
Reach:
Speed:
Figure 5-168
states.
OPEN<
RETRACTED
NORMAL
Continuation Dialog
Step 2
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
5-152 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Grip
Open indicates that the
Gripper is open
Closed indicates that the
Gripper is closed
Reach
Retracted indicates that the
Gripper is retracted
Extended indicates that the
Gripper is extended
Speed
Normal uses predefined
normal speed
Slow uses predefined slow
speed
Press the
Step 3
01 Aug 2000
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for the desired parameters in the list.
Service Menu Selection
5-153
Scanner Submenu
When Scanner is selected, the Scanner Submenu is
displayed. This submenu offers two selections. See
Figure 5-169. The Scanner Menu defaults to the Adjust
selection.
>Adjust...
Triger...
Fiducial Test...
Figure 5-169
Scanner Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Adjust Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
Trigger Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Adjust Dialog on
page 5-155, Trigger Dialog on page 5-156, or Fiducial
Test Dialog on page 5-157.
5-154 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Adjust Dialog
When Adjust is selected, the Adjust Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-170. This option positions the barcode scanner beam
over a specific location. This option is used by Customer
Engineer to adjust the beam. Refer to the Scalar 1000
Maintenance Guide for the step by step procedure to adjust the
scanner.
DIAGS SCANNER ADJUST
Adjust scanner until
beam is level.
Y Position : 1002.0<
Figure 5-170
Adjust Dialog
Step 1
01 Aug 2000
Press the
button or the
Y position parameter values.
button to alter the
Parameters
Values
Y Position
Indicates the returned vertical
position value of the scanner
Service Menu Selection
5-155
Trigger Dialog
When Trigger is selected, the Trigger Dialog is displayed.
See Figure 5-171. This option triggers the barcode scanner to
read, decode, and display whatever barcode label is within
the range of the beam.
SCANNER TRIGGER
Pressing Enter will
trigger scanner
BC :000389
Figure 5-171
Response Screen
Step 1
5-156 Menus and Commands
Press the
button to trigger the scanner.
Parameters
Values
BC
Returns the barcode label
information for the storage
cartridge.
600561-A
Fiducial Test Dialog
When Fiducial Test is selected, the Fiducial Test Dialog
is displayed. See Figure 5-172. This option allows the operator
to test the scanner to determine if it is functioning properly.
Loops: 00 Test: 1
Xcnt: 000000
Ycnt: 000000
Continue: Y<
Figure 5-172
Fiducial Test Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Test
1 will read the first storage
fiducial and display the found
edge coordinates.
2 will read the Insert/Eject
Station fiducial and display the
found edge coordinates.
Continue
Y to continue running the test.
N to cancel the test.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
The value of the Loops parameter in the Fiducial
Test Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and
can not be changed. The Loop parameter indicates
how often the test has been run.
The value of the XCnt parameter in the Fiducial Test
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
not be changed. The XCnt parameter indicates the x
edge position count in tenths of a mm.
The value of the YCnt parameter in the Fiducial Test
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-157
not be changed. The YCnt parameter indicates the
Y edge position count in tenths of a mm.
Step 2
5-158 Menus and Commands
Repeat Step 1 several times to ensure the X and Y
position counts are within 10 tenths of a mm each
time the test is run.
600561-A
Accessor Submenu
When Accessor is selected, the Accessor Submenu is
displayed. This menu offers two selections. See Figure 5-173.
The Accessor Submenu defaults to the Move selection.
>Move...
Step...
Figure 5-173
Accessor Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
button to select the Move Dialog.
— or —
Press the
button or the
Step Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. Refer to Move Dialog on
page 5-160, or Step Dialog on page 5-162.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-159
Move Dialog
When Move is selected, the Move Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-174. This options moves the accessor in a figure eight
pattern without accessing cartridges.
The accessor test
does corner moves.
Cycles to run:
009<
Accept: N
Figure 5-174
Move Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Cycles to Run
Indicates the desired cycle
count (001 .. 999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Screen appears. Refer to Figure 5-175 on page
5-161. Otherwise, the changed parameters continue to
display but no action is taken.
5-160 Menus and Commands
600561-A
DIAGS ACCESSOR TEST
Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-175
Response Dialog
Step 3
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Press the
button or the
Cancel parameter values.
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Cancel
Y to cancel the test.
N to continue running the test.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
The value of the Cycle parameter in the Response
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
not be changed. The Cycle parameter indicates the
number of completed test cycles of requested
cycles.
The value of the Status parameter in the Response
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
not be changed. The Status parameter shows the
status of the indicated cycle (Running, Completed,
Error, Canceled).
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter value, the test is
cancelled. Otherwise, the test continues.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-161
Step Dialog
When Step is selected, the Step Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-176. This option provides low level control of the
accessor. The option should be used by trained service
personnel.
This test should be
used by trained
personnel ONLY!
Continue: N<
Figure 5-176
Step Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to continue the test.
N to cancel the test
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the
Response Screen appears. See Figure 5-177.
Use Arrows to Move
X axis : 0539.0mm<
Y axis : 0000.0mm
Amount : 001.0mm
Figure 5-177
5-162 Menus and Commands
Movement Dialog
600561-A
Parameters
Values
Press the
X axis
Indicates X axis location
button or the
Y axis
Indicates Y axis location
Amount
Indicates move step distance
(1, 10 .. 100 mm)
Note
button to
move the selected
axis by the
specified amount.
Use the
button to move
between the
parameters.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-163
SelfTest Dialog
When SelfTest is selected, the SelfTest Dialog is displayed.
See Figure 5-178. This option executes a predetermined
sequence of diagnostics and exercisers.
The self test runs
a sequence of diags.
Cycles to run:
009<
Accept: N
Figure 5-178
SelfTest Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter values and move to the next parameter.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Cycles to Run
Indicates the desired cycle
count (001 .. 999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-179. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
DIAGS SELF TEST
Cycle : 006 of 009
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-179
5-164 Menus and Commands
Response Dialog
600561-A
Step 3
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Press the
button or the
Cancel parameter values.
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Cycle
The number of completed test
cycles of the requested cycles
Status
Shows the status of the
indicated cycle (Running,
Completed, Error, Canceled)
Cancel
Y to cancel the test.
N to continue running the test.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter value, the test is
cancelled. Otherwise, the test continues.
PowerSup Dialog
When PowerSup is selected, the Power Supply Screen is
displayed if dual power supplies are installed. See
Figure 5-180. This screen shows installed DC power supply
status with respect to AC input and DC output, indicating
whether the power supplies are functioning properly. If dual
power supplies are not installed, the Function Not Available
Screen appears. See Figure 5-181.
1.
1.
2.
2.
Figure 5-180
24V
48V
24V
48V
DC:
DC:
DC:
DC:
Y
Y
Y
Y
AC:
AC:
AC:
AC:
Y
Y
Y
Y
Power Supply Screen
This function is not yet
available. Press Escape
Figure 5-181
01 Aug 2000
Function Not Available
Service Menu Selection
5-165
Step 1
5-166 Menus and Commands
Press the
Submenu.
button to return to the Diags
600561-A
Teach Submenu
When Teach is selected, the Teach Submenu is displayed.
This submenu offers two selections. See Figure 5-182. The
Teach menu defaults to the Teach New selection.
>Teach New...
Teach Current...
Figure 5-182
Teach Submenu
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Teach New
— or —
Press the
button or the
Teach Current Dialog.
Press the
button to select the
button.
The selected menu appears. See Teach New Dialog or
Teach Current Dialog on page 5-169.
Teach New Dialog
Note
The Teach New
operation clears
all cell statistics
01 Aug 2000
When Teach New is selected, the Teach New Dialog is
displayed. Refer to Figure 5-183 on page 5-168. This option
resets and re-initializes the library configuration and
calibration information. All previous information is
destroyed. An inventory is required after the Teach New
operation.
Service Menu Selection
5-167
A teach new will
clear and reset the
complete database.
Continue: N
Figure 5-183
Teach New Dialog
Step 1
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to continue the teach new.
N to return to the previous
menu
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the
Progress Screen, see Figure 5-184, followed by the
Response Screen, see Figure 5-185, appear.
The requested teach
is in progress...
Figure 5-184
5-168 Menus and Commands
Progress Screen
600561-A
The requested teach
completed OK.
Figure 5-185
Response Screen
Teach Current Dialog
When Teach Current is selected, the Teach Current Dialog
is displayed. See Figure 5-186. This option re-calibrates the
library coordinate information. All previous configuration
and inventory information is retained.
A teach current will
reset the positional
information only.
Continue: N
Figure 5-186
Teach Current Dialog
Step 1
Press the
value.
button to select the current parameter
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the Continue parameter values.
Parameters
Values
Continue
Y to continue the teach current
N to return to the previous
menu
If Y is selected for the Continue parameter value, the
Starting and Ending Dialog Screen appears. Refer to
Figure 5-188 on page 5-171.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-169
Starting Box: 01
Ending Box : 02
Accept: N
Figure 5-187
Starting and Ending Dialog
Step 2
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value.
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the Starting Box and Ending Box
parameters.
Parameters
Values
Starting Box
Indicates which frame to begin
the Teach Current operation.
(1 .. 4 depending on the
number of expansion
modules)
Ending Box
Indicates which frame to end
the Teach Current operation.
(1 .. 4 depending on the
number of expansion
modules)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 3
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Progress Screen, refer to Figure 5-188 on page 5-171,
followed by the Response Screen, refer to Figure 5-189 on
page 5-171 appear.
5-170 Menus and Commands
600561-A
The requested teach is
now in progress...
Figure 5-188
Progress Screen
The requested teach
completed OK.
Figure 5-189
01 Aug 2000
Response Screen
Service Menu Selection
5-171
SAC Dialog
When SAC is selected, the SAC Dialog is displayed.
See Figure 5-190. This option displays explanations
of the displayed Service Action Code.
Enter SAC to lookup:
SAC: E1
I/E station door is
not closed
Figure 5-190
SAC Dialog
For additional information on the SAC codes, refer
to Service Action Codes on page 7-3.
Note
Press the
button or the
button to
scroll between
SAC values.
Demo Dialog
When Demo is selected, the Demo Dialog is displayed. See
Figure 5-191. This option moves cartridges from storage
element to storage element. The tape drives are not used.
At least one storage element for each media type must be
empty for the Demo option to run.
For demo, all media
will be moved
Cycles to Run: 009<
Accept: N
Figure 5-191
Demo Dialog
Step 1
5-172 Menus and Commands
Press the
button to select the current
parameter value and move to the next parameter.
600561-A
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to toggle
between the parameter values in the following list.
Parameters
Values
Cycles to Run
Indicates the desired cycle
count (001 .. 999)
Accept
Y to accept changes
N to reject changes
Press the
Step 2
button to confirm the changes.
Repeat Step 1 for all of the parameters in the list.
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter, the Include
Drives Dialog appears. See Figure 5-192. Otherwise, the
changed parameters continue to display but no action is
taken.
Include drives: Y
Accept: Y
Figure 5-192
Include Drives Dialog
Step 3
Press the
button to select the current parameter
value and move to the next parameter.
— and/or —
Step 4
01 Aug 2000
Press the
button or the
values in the following list.
button to toggle the
Parameters
Values
Include Drives
Y indicates that the drives will
be included in the cycling of
the cartridges
N indicates that the drives will
not be included in the cycling
of the cartridges.
Accept
Y to accept the changed
N to reject the changes.
Service Menu Selection
5-173
If Y is selected for the Accept parameter value, the
Response Dialog appears. See Figure 5-193. Otherwise,
the changed parameters continue to display but no action
is taken.
Demo with Drives
Cycle : 5 of 9
Status: Running
Cancel: N<
Figure 5-193
Response Dialog
Step 5
Note
If the operation
stops, the Cancel
parameter no
longer displays.
Press the
button or the
the Cancel parameter values.
button to toggle
Parameters
Values
Cancel
Y to cancel the test.
N to continue running the test.
Press the
button to confirm the changes.
The value of the Cycle parameter in the Response
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
not be changed. The Cycle parameter indicates the
number of completed test cycles of requested
cycles.
The value of the Status parameter in the Response
Dialog is supplied by the library firmware and can
not be changed. The Status parameter shows the
status of the indicated cycle (Running, Completed,
Error, Canceled).
If Y is selected for the Cancel parameter value, the test is
cancelled. Otherwise, the test continues.
5-174 Menus and Commands
600561-A
Advanced Dialog
When Advanced is selected, the Advanced Dialog is
displayed. See Figure 5-194.
>Status Change...
Drive Mounts...
Other Functions...
Figure 5-194
Advanced Dialog
To choose one of the two selections, follow the steps.
Step 1
Press the
Dialog.
button to select the Status Change
— or —
Press the
button or the
button to select the
Drive Mounts Dialog, or the Other Functions
Dialog.
Press the
button.
The selected menu appears. See Status Change Dialog, or
refer to Drive Mounts Dialog on page 5-176 or Other
Functions Dialog on page 5-176.
Status Change Dialog
When Status Change is selected, the Status Change Dialog
is displayed. Refer to Figure 5-195 on page 5-176. This dialog
is reserved for Customer and Product Engineering Services
and is password protected.
01 Aug 2000
Service Menu Selection
5-175
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-195
Status Change Dialog
Drive Mounts Dialog
When Drive Mounts is selected, the Drive Mounts Dialog
is displayed. See Figure 5-196. This dialog is reserved for
Customer and Product Engineering Services and is password
protected.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-196
Drive Mounts Dialog
Other Functions Dialog
When Other Functions is selected, the Other Functions
Dialog is displayed. See Figure 5-197. This dialog is reserved
for Customer and Product Engineering Services and is
password protected.
Enter password:
[0000]
^
Accept: N
Figure 5-197
5-176 Menus and Commands
Other Functions Dialog
600561-A
About Screen Selection
The About screen displays information about the version of
embedded software. About is selected from the Main Menu
by following the procedure.
Step 1
If necessary, press the
Menu appears.
button until the Main
The Main Menu appears with the indicator positioned at
Mode.
Step 2
Press the
button or the
button to position
the selection indicator at About.
Step 3
Press the
button.
The About Screen appears. See Figure 5-198.
FIRMWARE LEVEL
(c) Copyright 2000
Version 3.00.0014
Figure 5-198
01 Aug 2000
About Screen
Parameter
Value
Version
Indicates the current version of
the Control Module firmware.
About Screen Selection
5-177
5-178 Menus and Commands
600561-A
6
Processing
Media
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Inserting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Direct Insertion into the Control or Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Ejecting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Direct Removal from the Control or Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Processing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Barcode Label Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Applying the Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Firmware Directed Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
AutoClean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Operator Initiated Drive Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-2
Processing Media
600561-A
6-
Overview
During the course of normal operations, it may become
necessary to add or remove storage cartridges to or from the
library. Two methods are available to insert or eject storage
cartridges. Information is also supplied about processing the
media and using cleaning media.
Inserting Media
Placing new media into the library is accomplished by using
the Insert/Eject Station. Alternately, the cartridge could be
placed directly into a specific storage cell location by the
Operator.
Insert/Eject Station
Using the Insert/Eject Station to insert cartridges does not
disrupt library operations. To insert cartridges through the
Insert/Eject Station, follow this procedure.
Step 1
Pull on the handle of the Insert/Eject Station.
The Insert/Eject Station slides out.
Step 2
Insert the cartridge into the storage cell.
Step 3
Close the Insert/Eject Station.
The library locks the Insert/Eject Station. The accessor
scans the cartridge. The library unlocks the Insert/Eject
Station.
Step 4
Move the cartridge to the desired storage cell with
the SCSI MOVE MEDIUM command from the
host.
— or —
Issue the Insert command from the Operator panel.
Refer to Insert Screen on page 5-55.
The Accessor moves the cartridge to the first available
storage cell location.
01 Aug 2000
Overview
6-3
Direct Insertion into the Control or
Expansion Module
STATIC
SENSITIVE
There are two levels of access control. The first is a mechanical
lock which is manipulated by the key. The second is password
protection which is invoked by either the host SCSI Mode
Select command, LCD Page Security option, or through the
Security option on the Operator panel.
To directly insert media, follow this procedure.
If enabled, all locks must be disabled before the procedure
will succeed.
Step 1
If the password option is enabled, enter the
password.
Step 2
Use the Operator panel to place the library into the
NOTREADY state. Refer to Mode Dialog Selection on
page 5-9.
The accessor completes any current task and returns to
the home position.
Caution
Step 3
Using the key, unlock and open the library door.
Step 4
Place the cartridge into the desired storage cell.
Step 5
Close and lock the door.
Step 6
Place the library in the READY state. Refer to Mode
Dialog Selection on page 5-9.
Step 7
If Auto-Inventory is disabled, execute a SCSI
INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS or a library
Inventory command.
Ejecting Media
Removing media from the library is accomplished by using
the Insert/Eject Station. Alternately, the cartridge could be
directly removed from a specific storage cell location by the
Operator.
6-4
Processing Media
600561-A
Insert/Eject Station
Using the Insert/Eject Station to remove cartridges does not
disrupt library operations. To remove cartridges through the
Insert/Eject Station, follow this procedure.
Step 1
Issue a SCSI MOVE MEDIUM command from the
host with the source storage cell and the destination
Insert/Eject Station cell.
— or —
Execute the Eject command from the Operator
panel. Refer to Eject Dialog on page 5-61.
The Insert/Eject Station is locked while the accessor
moves the cartridge. After the move completes, the
Insert/Eject Station unlocks.
01 Aug 2000
Step 2
Pull on the handle to open the Insert/Eject Station.
Step 3
Remove the cartridge from the storage cell.
Step 4
Close the Insert/Eject Station.
Ejecting Media
6-5
Direct Removal from the Control or
Expansion Module
STATIC
SENSITIVE
There are two levels of access control. The first is a mechanical
lock which is manipulated by the key. The second is password
protection which is invoked by either the host SCSI Mode
Select command, LCD Page Security option, or through the
Security option on the Operator panel.
To directly remove media, follow this procedure.
If enabled, all locks must be disabled before the procedure
will succeed.
Step 1
If the password option is enabled, enter the
password.
Step 2
Use the Operator panel to place the library into the
NOTREADY state. Refer to Mode Dialog Selection on
page 5-9.
The accessor completes any current task and returns to
the home position.
Caution
Step 3
Using the key, unlock and open the library door.
Step 4
Remove the cartridge from the desired storage cell.
Step 5
Close and lock the door.
Step 6
Place the library in the READY state. Refer to Mode
Dialog Selection on page 5-9.
Step 7
If Auto-Inventory is disabled, execute a SCSI
INITIALIZE ELEMENT STATUS or a library
Inventory command.
Processing Media
Each tape cartridge in the Scalar 1000 must have an external
label that is operator and machine readable to identify the
barcode number (BC). A BC must use only uppercase letters
A-Z and/or numeric values 0-9. The Scalar 1000 currently
supports Code 39 and Storage Technology type barcode
labels.
6-6
Processing Media
600561-A
Note
The 6 character
8mm bar code
labels contain a
7th character
checksum, which
is ignored in
DEFAULT media
mode, is reported
as A in MIXED
media mode, and
interpreted as
part of the bar
code in
EXTENDED
mode.
The labels may have 5-16 characters (library in EXTENDED
media mode), or 6 characters plus a possible media identifier
character (library in DEFAULT media mode), or 6 characters
with an additional media identifier character (library in
MIXED media mode).
An additional seventh character label may be used to identify
the cartridge type. The cartridge type is a separate single
character that follows the BC label or a single character that is
included with the 6 character BC. The seventh character
definition is as follows:
•
The character 1 is used to identify the 3480 cartridges and
is separate from the 6 character BC label.
•
The character E is used to identify the ADIC 8490/IBM
3490E cartridge and is separate from the 6 character BC
label.
•
The character J is used to identify the IBM 3590 cartridge
and is separate from the 6 character BC label.
•
The character M is used to identify the Plasmon NCTP
cartridge and is separate from the 6 character BC label.
•
The character C is used to identify the DLT CompacTape
III cartridge and is included on the 6 character BC label.
•
The character D is used to identify the DLT CompacTape
IV cartridge and is included on the 6 character BC label.
•
The characters E is used to identify the DLT CompacTape
IIIXT and is included on the 6 characters BC label.
•
The character A is used to identify the AIT 8mm cartridge.
Although this media identifier is currently not available
for AIT 8mm barcode labels, such ID will be reported for
all AIT 8mm barcode labels.
Barcode Labels
For customers who wish to print the barcode labels, the
individual media labels are supported if the labels meet the
ANSI MH10.8M-1983 standard and other additional
requirements. The requirements are:
01 Aug 2000
Barcode Labels
6-7
•
ANSI MH10.8M-1983 Standard
•
Number of digits:
♦
5 - 16 in extended mode
6 (7 including media character) in default and
mixed media mode
Background reflection: at least 25 percent
Print contrast: at least 75 percent
Ratio: at least 2.2
Module: 250 mm
Print tolerance: ± 57 mm
♦
•
•
•
•
•
•
Additional Requirements
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Length of the rest zones: 5.25 mm ± 0.25 mm
No black marks can be present in the intermediate
spaces or rest zones
No white areas may be present on the bars
A 9 digit bar code must not match the serial number
of the unit, otherwise it will be ignored
Bars should read in a uniform direction. Nonuniform
reading directions are feasible in principle, but have a
detrimental effect on performance
Each label should be applied in the upper right corner
of the tape cartridge recess (when oriented vertically)
Quality Testing
Compliance with these specifications can be checked and
documented with the Ergilaser 3000 High Density bar code
measuring device that is manufactured by the Laetus
Company.
If barcode scanning labels are purchased, the individual
media labels are supported if they are acquired from the
sources listed in Table 6-1 on page 6-8.
Table 6-1
Supported Labels
Media
Model 8490
IBM 3590
NCTP
6-8
Processing Media
Label
Source
Tri-Code
American Eagle Systems, Inc.
Tri-Optic
Engineered Data Products
600561-A
Table 6-1
Supported Labels
Media
Label
Source
DLT-III
Engineered Data Products
1703-0C
DLT-IV
Engineered Data Products
1703-0D
DLT-IIIXT
Engineered Data Products
1703-0E
AIT Series (8mm)
Engineered Data Products
Barcode Label Restrictions
Note
Duplicate BC
labels are not
supported even if
different media
labels are used.
The Scalar 1000 supports a range of media labels. With mixed
media enabled, some additional restrictions apply. The label
types supported in mixed media enabled and mixed media
disabled are illustrated in Figure 6-1 on page 6-10.
All labels are restricted to lengths of 5 to 16 characters in
extended mode, and 6 characters plus a media identifier, in
default and mixed-media mode. For half inch and DLT media,
in default mode the media identifier is ignored by the library
firmware. In mixed-media mode the media identifier is
required.
The 7th character media identifier may be separate from the
barcode label, as in the case of half inch media, or may be
embedded in the barcode label, as in the case of DLT media.
8mm barcode labels do not provide media identifier
characters but contain an embedded checksum character,
which will be disregarded by the library firmware in default
and mixed-media modes. In extended mode, the checksums
and media identifiers are reported as part of the barcode label.
01 Aug 2000
Barcode Labels
6-9
1
2
Figure 6-1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Barcode Label Examples
The numeric listing above each label type identifies the
restriction associated with the label.
6-10
Processing Media
1
This is a 6 character Code 39 forward
printed label for a half inch cartridge. This
label can be used only when mixed media
is disabled.
2
This is a 6 character Code 39 backward
printed label for a half inch cartridge. This
label can be used only when mixed media
is disabled.
3
This is a 6 character Tri-Optic forward
printed label for a half inch cartridge. This
label can be used only when mixed media
is disabled.
4
This is a 6 character Tri-Optic forward
printed label with one additional character
media identifier for a half inch cartridge.
This label can be used in both mixed media
enabled and mixed media disabled
applications.
600561-A
5
This is a 6 character Tri-Optic forward
printed label with one additional character
media identifier for a half inch cartridge.
This label can be used in both mixed media
enabled and mixed media disabled
applications.
6
This is a 6 character Code 39 forward
printed label for a DLT cartridge. This label
can be used only when mixed media is
disabled.
7
This is a 6 character Code 39 forward
printed label for a DLT cartridge. This label
can be used only when mixed media is
disabled.
8
This is a 7 character Code 39 backward
printed label. The embedded additional 7th
character media identifies the DLT
cartridge media type. This label can be used
in both mixed media enabled and mixed
media disabled applications.
9
This is a 6 character forward printed label
for an 8mm cartridge. This label can be
used only when mixed media mode is
disabled.
Applying the Label
All barcode scanning labels are applied to the front of the
cartridge. Extreme care should be take to ensure that the
barcode labels are never applied in an upside down fashion.
Cleaning Drives
Two methods are available for cleaning tape drives. The first
method is controlled by Scalar 1000 firmware and applies to
supported drives, e.g., 4001S, 7001S, 8001S, AIT3102, AIT5002,
AIT5102, and NCTP. The second method is controlled by the
host and applies to all drive types in the Scalar 1000. Host
controlled drive cleaning is the default condition.
There are common items which are used for either Scalar 1000
firmware or host controlled drive cleaning. The following
items refers to several Operator Panel menus. All menu
information is detailed in Chapter 5. These items are as follows:
01 Aug 2000
Cleaning Drives
6-11
Note
•
It is possible to
use the
Insert/Eject
station as storage
for cleaning
media but this
practice is not
recommended.
Under the Commands Menu selection, Insert/Eject
Submenu, and Clean Media Insert Dialog, move either a
single media or bulk load cleaning media from the
Insert/Eject station to the designated empty storage cells.
Refer to Insert Clean Tape Dialog on page 5-56. As an
alternate method, open the Scalar 1000 door(s) and
manually bulk load the cleaning media into empty
storage cells. The Scalar 1000 supports a total of 128
cleaning tapes.
If cleaning media are manually bulk loaded and
Auto-Inventory is disabled, an inventory is required. Refer
to Direct Insertion into the Control or Expansion Module on
page 6-4.
Note
If a host shares
Scalar 1000
firmware
controlled
cleaning media,
the Scalar 1000
firmware will not
change or update
cleaning media
usage
information.
Therefore, the
host should not
share Scalar 1000
controlled
cleaning media.
•
Under the Setup Menu selection, Cleaning Submenu, and
Media Dialog, specify the cleaning media by BC
identifier. Cleaning media is tracked by firmware and the
tracking is not lost during a power off/power on cycle.
When a cleaning media expires, a message is generated to
inform the operator. Refer to Media Dialog on page 5-103.
•
Under the Setup Menu selection, Cleaning Submenu, and
Drives Dialog, choose either Scalar 1000 firmware or Host
controlled drive cleaning. Refer to Drives Dialog on page
5-101.
If there are errors in the cleaning operation or for additional
information, use the View Dialog. Refer to View Dialog on
page 5-105.
Firmware Directed Drive Cleaning
This section outlines the method used to clean supported
drives under Scalar 1000 firmware control. The following
information refers to several Operator Panel menus. All menu
information is detailed in Chapter 5.
AutoClean
If firmware control was indicated in the Drives Dialog menu,
follow the list of items.
•
Under the Setup Menu selection, Cleaning Submenu, and
Drives Dialog, choose either Delayed or Immediate
option. Refer to Drives Dialog on page 5-101.
•
6-12
Processing Media
If the Delayed option is selected, establish the
cleaning process time by setting the Hour and Second
option values.
600561-A
Since the Scalar 1000 will go NOTREADY for the duration
of the cleaning operation, the Delayed option should be
initiated during routine or normal downtime.
• If the Immediate option is selected, every dismount
causes the firmware to check for a cleaning request
from the drive and, if requested, cleans the drive
immediately.
If the firmware receives a clean drive request, the dismount
response is held until the cleaning process has finished. It is
recommended that the host extend the timeout period
normally associated with waiting for a dismount response.
Operator Initiated Drive Cleaning
This section outlines the method used to clean drives under
operator control. For information about the menus, refer to
Chapter 5.
Despite the settings for Scalar 1000 or host controlled cleaning,
an operator may initiate drive cleaning at any time.
•
01 Aug 2000
Under the Utils Menu selection, Drives Submenu, use the
Clean Drives Dialog to initiate a drive cleaning operation.
Refer to Clean Drives Dialog on page 5-123.
Cleaning Drives
6-13
6-14
Processing Media
600561-A
7
Error
Messages
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Service Action Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Error Log Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-2
Error Messages
600561-A
7-
Overview
When a failure occurs, the Scalar 1000 firmware performs
error recovery and reporting. If the failure requires a service
call, Service Action Codes (SACs) are generated and posted to
the Operator panel. When an operator intervention is
required, a message is generate at the Operator Panel.
Service Action Codes
Table 7-1 lists the SACs and the corresponding actions that
can be performed by an Operator.
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
01
SAC Reporting
Perform these actions
Type 1 Software errors including Microcode and Operating System errors.
Retrieve the current Microcode dump.
Power Off and On the Scalar 1000 Control Module to recover from the error.
Use the On/Off rocker power switch to perform this action. Wait at least one
minute between Power Off and Power On.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
02
Type 2 Software errors including Microcode and Operating System errors.
Force a Microcode Dump and retrieve it.
Power Off and On the Scalar 1000 Control Module to recover from the error.
Use the Circuit Breaker to perform this action. Wait at least one minute between
Power Off and Power On.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
01 Aug 2000
Overview
7-3
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
03
SAC Reporting
Perform these actions
Type 3 Software errors including Microcode and Operating System errors.
Retrieve the current Microcode dump.
Force another Microcode Dump and retrieve it.
Power Off and On the Scalar 1000 Control Module to recover from the error.
Use the Circuit Breaker to perform this action. Wait at least one minute between
Power Off and Power On.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
04
Type 4 Software errors including Microcode and Operating System errors
(the errors are not mapped).
Retrieve the current Microcode dump.
Force another Microcode Dump and retrieve it.
Power Off and On the Scalar 1000 Control Module to recover from the error.
Use the Circuit Breaker to perform this action. Wait at least one minute between
Power Off and Power On.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
05
A permanent Software error occurred
Power Off and On the Scalar 1000 Control Module to recover from the error.
Use the Circuit Breaker to perform this action. Wait at least one minute between
Power Off and Power On.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
10
Barcode scanner communications failed.
Power Off and On the Scalar 1000 Control Module to recover from the error.
Use the Circuit Breaker to perform this action. Wait at least one minute between
Power Off and Power On.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
12
Barcode scanner communication is OK, Barcode scanner reports that data is
bad.
Retrieve the current Microcode dump.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
7-4
Error Messages
600561-A
Table 7-1
Reported
SAC
13
SAC Reporting
Perform these actions
Cannot read Cartridge Barcode label.
Check Cartridge label to ensure that it meets specifications and is installed
properly. Look for the following:
• a damaged or dirty label
• Library not configured for correct media mode
• too short (less than 5 characters) or too long (more than 16 characters) label.
The cell in question is displayed with the Service Action Code. Run the Start
Option from the Operator Panel to retrieve this information. Refer to Service
Menu Selection on page 5-130.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
14
Cannot read the Serial Number label during a Teach operation.
Check the Serial Number label to ensure that it is installed properly and not
damaged or dirty.
The Serial Number label is located on the lower right corner of the first 5x10 or
5x15 storage array in the Control Module. The Serial Number label contains a
barcode and readable serial number. Example: 201100031
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
30
A fatal error is detected in SCSI Port 0.
Verify that the library Port 0 is configured by using the Operator Panel Main
Menu.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
31
A fatal error is detected in SCSI Port 1.
Verify the Library SCSI Port 1 is properly configured by using the Operator
Panel Main Menu.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
32
Wrong SCSI bus connection is detected.
Verify that the Host SCSI bus is the same type as the Library SCSI Adapter card
in Port 0 by using the Operator Panel Main Menu.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
01 Aug 2000
Service Action Codes
7-5
Table 7-1
SAC Reporting
Reported
SAC
33
Perform these actions
Wrong SCSI bus connection is detected.
Verify that the Host SCSI bus is the same type as the library SCSI Adapter card
by using the Operator Panel Main Menu.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
40
The Library Aisle power cannot be enabled.
Check that all doors are closed.
Contact ATAC.
50
A cartridge is not properly seated in the storage cell.
Check to ensure that the cartridge in question is properly installed in its storage
cell.
Check cartridge label to ensure that it is within specifications and is installed
properly and is not damaged or dirty.
Reteach the library using the Operator panel.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
60
Cannot complete Lock/Unlock I/E station commands.
Run the Lock Diagnostics from the Operator Panel to check for mechanical
binding.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
71
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Finger Close operation.
Run Teach Current.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
72
A Get command is issued but the sensor indicated that a cartridge is already
present in the Gripper Assembly.
Look into the Gripper Assembly and see if a cartridge is present.
If a cartridge is found:
• Perform the actions in Service Action Code 02.
If no cartridge is found in the Gripper Assembly:
• Contact ATAC.
7-6
Error Messages
600561-A
Table 7-1
SAC Reporting
Reported
SAC
Perform these actions
74
A Get command is issued but the sensor indicated that the location is empty.
Look into the location (cell or drive) and see if a cartridge is present.
If no cartridge is found in this location:
• Perform the actions in Service Action Code 02.
If a cartridge is found:
• Contact ATAC.
78
A Put command is issued but the sensor indicated that the cartridge is not
present in the Gripper Assembly.
Look into the Gripper Assembly and see if a cartridge is present.
If a cartridge is found:
• Contact ATAC.
If no cartridge is found in the Gripper Assembly:
• Perform the actions in Service Action Code 02.
79
Failures detected in putting a cartridge into a DLT tape drive.
Check the DLT tape drive to ensure that it is powered On and working
properly. Refer to the DLT Maintenance Manual for any DLT drive problem.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
7C
Failures detected in the Gripper Assembly Reach operation.
Check for obstruction in the cell. Obstruction can be an unlabeled cartridge or a
cartridge in the cell during a Put operation.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
7D
Failures detected while getting a cartridge from the Tape Drive.
Check for a tape in the Tape drive.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
83
The Locate Fiducial Command failed with no target found. This failure
happens most likely during an initial installation of the Library Subsystem.
Check and clean all Teach Fiducial labels.
Run Teach New from the Operator panel. Check that the scan beam is
positioned directly in front of the label.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
01 Aug 2000
Service Action Codes
7-7
Table 7-1
SAC Reporting
Reported
SAC
E0
Perform these actions
A cartridge is stuck in the Gripper Assembly
Perform the following:
• Turn off the main power Switch located on the lower panel of the rear door of
all modules.
• Open the front door of the module where the Accessor is located.
• Lift the Accessor to the top of the Y axis rail and insert an allen wrench to stop
the Accessor from sliding down.
• Pull open the Insert/Eject Station.
• If necessary, gently move the Accessor along the X axis rail until the Accessor
is directly in front of the opened Insert/Eject Station.
• Gently pry apart the Accessor gripper fingers while moving the cartridge
from side to side.
• After the cartridge is free, close the Insert/Eject Station, remove the allen
wrench from the Accessor Y axis rail, close the front door, and apply power
to the Scalar 1000 modules.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
E1
The Insert/Eject Station door is not fully closed, Operator Intervention is
required to close the door.
Close the Insert/Eject Station door.
E2
The front door(s) are not fully closed, Operator Intervention is required to
close the door(s).
Close all the front door(s).
E3
Wrong SCSI bus connection is detected. A Single Ended SCSI device is
connected to Library Port 0 Differential Adapter.
Check the library configuration and make sure that all devices on the library
SCSI port 0 have the same SCSI type.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
E4
Wrong SCSI bus connection is detected. A Single Ended SCSI device is
connected to Library Port 1 Differential Adapter.
Check the library configuration and make sure that all devices on the library
SCSI port 1 have the same SCSI type.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
7-8
Error Messages
600561-A
Table 7-1
SAC Reporting
Reported
SAC
E5
Perform these actions
The SCSI bus connected to Library Port 0 is not properly terminated.
Check the SCSI bus for termination.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
E6
The SCSI bus connected to Library Port 1 is not properly terminated.
Check the SCSI bus for termination.
If the problem is not corrected or persists, contact ATAC.
E7
The Gripper Assembly detected that a cartridge is not present in the Grip
fingers. The cartridge may have been dropped or the Get operation was not
successful.
Look to see if the cartridge is in the storage cell, in the base of the Gripper
Assembly or on the floor of the Library. Recover the cartridge and re-inventory
the Library.
E8
During an accessor more to put a cartridge after a successful Get command,
the Gripper Assembly detected that the cartridge is no longer present in the
Grip fingers.
Look at the Gripper Assembly base or the floor of the Library to see if a
cartridge can be located.
EB
A battery low condition was detected in the Remote Management Unit
(RMU)
Replace the 9V battery in the RMU.
FOR ANY
OTHER
SAC
01 Aug 2000
Service may be required.
Contact ATAC and report the SAC.
Service Action Codes
7-9
Operator Intervention Messages
Table 7-2 describes the operator intervention messages. Each
intervention message is composed of four lines. The third
and/or fourth lines may contain variable information specific
to the message. For SAC indications, refer to Service Action
Codes on page 7-3. For Code error modifiers, refer to the
Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide.
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages
Message Lines
Alert not found.
Press Enter.
None
WARNING!
The accessor could
not be parked.
[OK]
None
WARNING
The doors could not
be unlocked.
[OK]
None
-=>ERROR!<=Initialization Error
Code: 0x%X
%X = 0x(8 digits)
error modifier
-=>PERM ERROR!<=CALL FOR SERVICE
SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 0x(8 digit)
error modifier
-=>PERM ERROR!<=SYSTEM WILL REBOOT
SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 0x(8 digit)
error modifier
->SYSTEM REBOOTED<NEW CODE LOADED
Version %X.%YY.%ZZZZ
->SYSTEM REBOOTED<RECOVERED FROM ERROR
SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
7-10
Error Messages
Variables
current version
%X = 1 digit major rev
%Y = 2 digit minor rev
%Z = 4 digit minor rev
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 0x(8 digit)
error modifier
600561-A
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages
Message Lines
01 Aug 2000
Variables
->SYSTEM REBOOTED<CALL FOR SERVICE
SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 0x(8 digit)
error modifier
->TOO MANY ERRORS!<CALL FOR SERVICE
SAC :%X
Code:0x%Y
%X = 2 digit hex
%Y = 0x(8 digit)
error modifier
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Close the I/E
station to complete
the operation.
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Unexpected door open
detected. Check all
doors for closure.
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Single-ended device
detected on diff.
SCSI bus port 0.
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Single-ended device
detected on diff.
SCSI bus port 1.
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Check SCSI bus port0
connector and/or
termination.
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Check SCSI bus port1
connector and/or
termination.
None
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Remove cartridge in
gripper, place back
into storage.
None
Operator Intervention Messages
7-11
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages
Message Lines
Variables
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Storage may be full,
or IE magazine types
may be incorrect.
None
SERVICE MODE
Cannot go online
None
Replace Terminator
7-12
Error Messages
BAD MEDIA
Cannot get type.
Please label media.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Remove cartridge
from cell.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
UPSIDE DOWN MEDIA
Ensure cartridge is
in cell properly.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
CELL IS OBSTRUCTED
Please check to see
if cell is empty.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
=
=
=
=
index number
rack number
column number
row number
CELL IS EMPTY
Please check to see
if cell is full.
Cell %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
LBI2 COMM FAILED
Please correct the
interface.
Box: %X
%X = box number
600561-A
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages
Message Lines
01 Aug 2000
Variables
DRIVE COMM FAILED
Please verify drive
communication path.
Drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
DRIVE SCSI ID FAILED
Please verify drive
SCSI id setting for
drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
drive number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
BUTTON PUSH FAILED
Please correct drive
push-button state.
Drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
TAPE PUSH FAILED
Please remove tape
from drive.
Drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
CLEAN TAPE MISSING
A previously defined
tape is missing:
volser %X
%X = volser number
CLEAN TAPE EXPIRED
Please remove the
cleaning tape number
%X volser %Y.
%X = tape number
%Y = volser number
NO CLEANING TAPE
Please insert a
cleaning tape for
drive %X.
%X = drive number
INTERVENTION NEEDED!
Locate dropped
cartridge, place
back into storage.
None
DRIVE CLEAN FAILED
A cleaning operation
failed to clean
None
Operator Intervention Messages
7-13
Table 7-2
Operator Intervention Messages
Message Lines
7-14
Error Messages
Variables
POWER SUPPLY ERROR
Check AC connection
and 24V converter
number %X
%X = 24 Volt
Connector Number
POWER SUPPLY ERROR
Check AC connection
and 48V converter
number %X
%X = 48 Volt
Connector Number
POWER SUPPLY ERROR
Check AC box and AC
connection to
primary/second DC supplies
None
INVALID LABEL
Please check cart.
for valid label
%X %Y (%Z %A %B %C)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
%C
=
=
=
=
=
=
type id
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
DRIVE INIT FAILED
Please correct drive
initialization for
drive %X (%Y %Z %A %B)
%X
%Y
%Z
%A
%B
=
=
=
=
=
index number
frame number
section letter
column number
row number
600561-A
Error Log Codes
In the event of an error, record the error information from the
Error Log screen for any future reference. Refer to Error Log
Dialog on page 5-35.
Table 7-3
Type
01 Aug 2000
Error Log Reporting
Error
Modifier
Date Error
Occurred
Error Log Codes
7-15
7-16
Error Messages
600561-A
Index
-AAbout Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
Accessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-6, 2-12, 4-39
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71, 5-96, 5-175
Applying the Barcode Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Area of Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Assistance with problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide . . . . . . . . 1-4
Scalar 1000 SCSI Reference Manual . . . . . 1-4
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Authorized Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
-BBar Code Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-15
barcode label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 2-15, 6-6
seventh character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 6-7
Barcode Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Barcode Labels
Applying the Barcode Label . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Barcode Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-13
BC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-15
-Ccartridge inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-13
Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7, 2-16
Chapter Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Cleaning Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Commands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Common Help Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Control Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-7, 2-13, 4-37
-DDatabase Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-116
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-172
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-135
Diag Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Direct Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Direct Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Down Arrow push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98, 5-101
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37, 5-117
Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-114
-EEject Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-63
Eject Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Ejecting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Direct Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Element Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28, 5-67
Emergency Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-92
Enter push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Escape push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-13, 4-37
external label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 2-15, 6-6
seventh character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 6-7
-FFibre Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 2-8
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5, 2-6, 4-8
Functional Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
-GGripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 2-13
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
-HHazard Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Help push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Horizontal Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Host Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Host Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
-IInitial Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Initialize Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Insert Clean Tape Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Insert/Eject Station 2-3, 2-6, 2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 6-3,
6-5
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Inserting Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Direct Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Insert/Eject Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
-LLibrary Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-76, 5-108
Locked indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
-MMain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5, 5-8
Main Power Switch . . . . . . . . 3-5, 3-6, 4-37, 4-39
Maintenance Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
in-2
Index
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66, 5-90, 5-103
Media Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Menus
About Dialog Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-177
Commands Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Insert/Eject Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Eject Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . . .5-63
Eject Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61
Insert Clean Tape Dialog . . . . . .5-56
Insert Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55
Inventory Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Move Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . .5-47
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . .5-45
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Database Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-65
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-71
Config Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-70
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-67
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-66
Main Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Mode Dialog Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9
Service Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
About Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-177
Advanced Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-175
Demo Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-172
Diag Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-133
Accessor Submenu . . . . . . . . . .5-159
DI/DO Submenu . . . . . . . . . . .5-135
Gripper Submenu . . . . . . . . . . .5-143
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . .5-154
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-172
Start Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-167
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . .5-169
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . .5-167
Setup Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-75
Cleaning Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-100
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-101
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-103
Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-98
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-76
Advance Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-96
Emulate Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-92
Host Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-82
Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-90
RMU Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-93
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-77
600561-A
Security Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Status Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Drive State Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Media Info Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Element Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Logs Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Utils Menu Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Drives Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
Clean Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Initialize Submenu . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . 5-118
Upload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . 5-125
Library Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Audio Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Date Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Mode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Move Media Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Move Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
-NNormal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
NotReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
-OOperator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-3
Operator Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 4-3, 4-7, 5-5
Push Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Down Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Escape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Up Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Visual Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
01 Aug 2000
-PPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43
Position to Elem Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Power On indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Processing Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Main Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6
-RReady . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Ready indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Ready push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
RMU Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-93
Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
-SSAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
SAC Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-172
Scalar 1000 Maintenance Guide . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Scalar 1000 Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Scalar 1000 SCSI Reference Manual . . . . . . . . .1-4
Scalar 1000 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Emergency Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Normal Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Scalar 1000 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-37
Scanner Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-154
Screen Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-109
SCSI Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14, 5-77
Security Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
SelfTest Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164
Service Action Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-130
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-75
seventh character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 6-7
special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Start Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-131
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Storage Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3, 2-6, 2-12, 2-13
Subsystem Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 4-8
Symbols and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
System Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
-TTape Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Tape Drive Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-12, 2-13
Teach Current Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-169
Index
in-3
Teach New Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Teach Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167
Time Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Trace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
-UUp Arrow push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Update Microcode Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Upload Drives Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Using the Operator Panel
Common Help Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Utils Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
-VVertical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
in-4
Index
600561-A